Перевод: со всех языков на английский

с английского на все языки

command mode

  • 61 haben

    n; -s, kein Pl.; FIN. credit (side); Soll und Haben credit and debit
    * * *
    to have; to have got
    * * *
    Ha|ben ['haːbn]
    nt -s, no pl
    credit

    im Háben stehen — to be on the credit side

    * * *
    1) ((also have got) to hold or possess (something which belongs to oneself or to someone else): I have a book of yours at home; He's got your book; I don't have any books by Sir Walter Scott.) have
    2) ((also have got) to possess something as part of oneself or in some way connected with oneself: She has blue eyes; Our house has six rooms; I've got a pain in my stomach.) have
    3) (to produce: He does have some good ideas; She has had a baby.) have
    4) (to enjoy or suffer: We had a lovely holiday.) have
    5) (to think or feel: I have some doubts about this project.) have
    6) ((an entry on) the side of an account on which payments received are entered: Our credits are greater than our debits.) credit
    7) (to feel: He took pleasure/pride / a delight / an interest in his work.) take
    * * *
    Ha·ben
    <-s>
    [ˈha:bn̩]
    nt kein pl credit
    mit etw dat im \Haben sein to be in credit by sth
    * * *
    das; Habens, Haben (Kaufmannsspr.) credit; s. auch Soll 1)
    * * *
    haben; hat, hatte, hat gehabt
    A. v/t
    1. (Arbeit, Erfahrung, Geld, Zeit etc) have (got); (besitzen) auch possess, own;
    haben wollen (wünschen) want (to have); (fordern) want, demand;
    die Erlaubnis/das Recht haben zu (+inf) have permission/the right to (+inf)
    woher hast du das? where did you get that (from)?; (Nachricht etc) where did you hear that?;
    kann ich mal das Salz haben? umg could I have the salt, please?;
    da hast du’s! umg there you are;
    zu haben Ware: available; Haus: for sale;
    ist es noch zu haben? auch is it still going (US up for sale)?;
    sie ist noch zu haben umg, fig she’s not spoken for, she’s (still) available, she’s (still) single;
    dafür bin ich nicht zu haben fig you can count me out; generell: that’s not (really) my thing;
    für ein Bier bin ich immer zu haben fig I’m always game for a beer;
    er hat schon viele Frauen gehabt umg, euph he’s already had a lot of women;
    wer hat, der hat! umg, hum oder iron if you’ve got it, flaunt it;
    was man hat, das hat man a bird in the hand (is worth two in the bush) sprichw, possession is nine points ( oder tenths) of the law;
    er hat’s ja! umg he can afford it; → haste
    2. (Eigenschaft, Krankheit, Unfall, Zustand etc) have (got);
    welche Farbe haben seine Augen? what colo(u)r are his eyes?;
    Glück/Pech haben be lucky/unlucky;
    einen Motorschaden haben have engine trouble;
    es im Hals haben umg have a sore throat;
    er hat Geburtstag it’s his birthday;
    gestern hatten wir Regen we had rain yesterday, it rained here yesterday;
    hast du heute Dienst/Schule/frei? are you on duty/have you got school/are you off today?;
    Mathe haben wir bei Herrn Hanel Mr Hanel takes us for math(s), US We have math with Mr. Hanel;
    in der vierten Stunde haben wir Physik we’ve got physics (in the) fourth period ( oder lesson);
    in Erdkunde haben wir gerade China we’re doing China in geography at the moment;
    da hast du’s! (siehst du?) I told you so
    3. (fühlen):
    Angst/Durst etc
    haben be afraid/thirsty etc;
    Schmerzen haben be in pain, have a pain sg;
    was hast du denn? umg what’s up ( oder wrong)?;
    hast du was? umg is something the matter?
    4. (bestehen aus) comprise, be made up of, consist of; (wiegen) weigh; (messen) measure;
    der Fisch hat zwei Kilo/zwanzig Zentimeter the fish weighs two kilos/is 20 centimetres (US -ers) long;
    ein Kilogramm hat tausend Gramm there are a thousand grams in a kilogram;
    der Verein hat 20 Mitglieder the club has 20 members;
    Deutschland hat 16 Bundesländer Germany is made up of 16 states
    wir haben (jetzt) April/genau sechs Uhr/Montag, den 7.11. it’s April/six o’clock precisely/Monday 7 November (US November 7th);
    wie viel Uhr haben wir? what time is it?;
    in New York haben sie jetzt Nacht it’s nighttime in New York at the moment
    6. umg als Brauch, Mode:
    das hat man jetzt so/wieder/nicht mehr Brauch: it’s what we do nowadays/we’ve gone back to doing it this way/we don’t do it like that any more; Mode: it’s the fashion/back in fashion/out of fashion now
    7. unpers, besonders südd, österr, schweiz:
    es hat there is/are;
    wie viel Grad hat es (draußen)? what’s the temperature (outside)?;
    dieses Jahr hat es wenig Pilze there aren’t very many mushrooms this year;
    was hat’s bei euch für Wetter? what sort of weather are you having?, what’s the weather like where you are?
    8. umg (beendet, bekommen, gemacht etc haben):
    hast du den Abwasch schon? have you finished washing up (yet)? (US finished the dishes [yet]?);
    hat man den Dieb schon? have they caught the thief yet?;
    hab ich dich endlich! (erwischt) got you!, gotcha! umg;
    das werden wir gleich haben! no problem; bei Reparatur etc: we’ll have that done ( oder fixed) in no time;
    ich hab’s bald (I’m) nearly finished;
    hast du’s bald? ungeduldig: how much longer are you going to take?;
    ich hab’s oder
    jetzt hab ich’s! (I’ve) got it!;
    hast du schon Nachricht von ihr? - Nein, hab ich nicht! have you heard from her yet? – No, I haven’t;
    was hast du in Mathe? Note: what did you get in math(s)?;
    dich hat’s wohl! oder
    hat’s dich jetzt ganz? (spinnst du?) you must be mad (US crazy)!, you’re off your head
    9. mit es und adj:
    du hast’s gut you’ve got it good umg, everything’s fine for you;
    ich hab’s eilig I’m in a hurry;
    schön habt ihr es hier it’s lovely for you here;
    jetzt haben wir’s nicht mehr weit not far to go now;
    sie will es so haben that’s the way she wants it;
    wie hätten Sie’s denn gern(e)? how would you like it?
    10. mit zu und inf:
    nichts/viel zu essen haben have nothing/a lot to eat;
    einen Brief zu schreiben haben have a letter to write;
    ich habe noch Geld von ihr zu bekommen I still have some money to come ( oder coming) from her, she still owes me some money;
    du hast hier/mir (gar) nichts zu befehlen oder
    sagen/verbieten it’s not up to you to tell people/me what to do/what not to do;
    was hast du hier zu suchen? (verschwinde!) what are you doing here?
    wo hast du dein Auto (stehen)? where did you leave your car?;
    einen Läufer vor dem Bett (liegen) haben have a rug in front of the bed;
    etwas nicht haben können umg (nicht ertragen, mögen) not be able to stand sth;
    das kann ich nicht haben! I can’t stand it; auf etwas Spezifisches reagierend: I’m not standing for that
    12. mit präp:
    eine Frau/einen Italiener als oder
    zum Chef haben have a woman/an Italian as one’s boss;
    ich habe an ihm einen Freund I have a friend in him;
    ich merke erst jetzt, was ich an ihr gehabt habe it’s only now that I can appreciate what I had in her (bzw what an asset oder a treasure oder a wonderful woman she was);
    er hat etwas Überspanntes an sich there’s something eccentric about him;
    das haben Katzen so an sich that’s just the way cats are;
    was hat es damit auf sich? what’s it all about?, what does it mean?;
    bei sich haben (Geld, Ausweis etc) have on ( oder with) one; (Person) have with one;
    es hat viel für sich there’s a lot to be said for it;
    was hast du gegen ihn? what have you got against him?;
    ich hab nichts gegen Raucher I have nothing against people who smoke;
    jetzt hätte ich nichts gegen ein Nickerchen I wouldn’t mind a little nap now;
    sie hatte alle gegen sich she had everyone against her;
    hinter sich (dat)
    haben (etwas) have been through sth; (jemanden) have sb behind one;
    das hätten wir hinter uns well, that’s that;
    haben have had a tiring day;
    haben be over 50, be the wrong side of 50;
    die Sache hat es in sich umg it’s not easy, it’s a tough one;
    der Likör hat es in sich it’s a pretty strong liqueur;
    hat sie was mit ihm? umg is there something going on between them?;
    hat er es schon mit ihr gehabt? umg has he had it ( oder done it) with her?;
    ich hab’s nicht (so) mit ihr/mit Pizza umg I don’t like ( oder get on [US along] with) her/I don’t go for ( oder I’m not into) pizza;
    die hat’s vielleicht mit i-r Ordnung! umg she’s got a real thing about tidiness;
    keine Eile there’s (still) plenty of time for that, there’s no hurry for that (yet);
    unter sich (dat)
    haben be in charge of; (befehligen) command;
    er hat viel von seinem Vater he takes after his father;
    haben wir gar nichts mehr von dir we’ll never see anything of you;
    wir haben nicht viel von unserem Urlaub gehabt we didn’t get much out of our holiday;
    was habe ich davon? umg what do I get out of it?, what for?;
    das hast du jetzt davon! umg see?;
    das hast du davon, wenn … umg that’s what you get when … ( oder from [+ger]);
    das haben wir noch vor uns that’s still to come, we’ve still got that to come;
    Sie wissen wohl nicht, wen Sie vor sich haben? you obviously don’t know who(m) you’re addressing;
    jemanden zum Feind/Freund haben have sb as an enemy/friend; → Anschein, Auge 1, gehabt, gern(e) etc
    B. v/i mit zu und inf:
    zu arbeiten/gehorchen etc
    haben (müssen) have to work/obey etc;
    ich hab zu tun I’ve got things to do;
    du hast gut lachen/reden you may well laugh/talk
    C. v/r umg:
    hab dich nicht so! don’t make such a fuss; (führ dich nicht so auf) don’t take (US carry) on like that;
    der hat sich vielleicht mit seinen Büchern! he makes such a fuss about his books!;
    und damit hat sich’s! and that’s that, and that’s final;
    es hat sich was damit it’s not that easy;
    hat sich was! some hope!
    D. v/aux have;
    hast du ihn gesehen? have you seen him?;
    ich habe bis jetzt gelesen I have been reading up to now;
    er hat uns gestern besucht he visited us yesterday;
    du hättest es mir sagen sollen you should have told me;
    er hätte es machen können he could have done it
    * * *
    das; Habens, Haben (Kaufmannsspr.) credit; s. auch Soll 1)
    * * *
    v.
    (§ p.,pp.: hatte, gehabt)
    = to have v.
    (§ p.,p.p.: had)
    to have got to expr.

    Deutsch-Englisch Wörterbuch > haben

  • 62 दिश् _diś

    1
    दिश् 6 U. (दिशति-ते, दिष्ट; desid. दिदिक्षति-ते)
    1 To point out, show, exhibit, produce (as a witness); साक्षिणः सन्ति मेत्युक्त्वा दिशेत्युक्तो दिशेन्न यः Ms.8.57,52,53.
    -2 To assign, allot; इष्टां गतिं तस्य सुरा दिशन्ति Mb.
    -3 To give, grant, bestow upon, deliver or make over to; बाणमत्रभवते निजं दिशन् Ki.13.68; R.5.3;11.2;16.72.
    -4 To pay (as tribute).
    -5 To consent to; भृत्यभावि दुहितुः परिग्रहाद्दिश्यतां कुलमिदं निमेरिति R.11.49.
    -6 To direct, order, command.
    -7 To allow, permit; स्मर्तुं दिशन्ति न दिवः सुरसुन्दरीभ्यः Ki.5.28. -Caus. (देशयति-ते)
    1 To show, point out, allot, assign.
    -2 To teach, communicate, tell, inform.
    -3 To direct, order.
    -4 To confer, bestow.
    2
    दिश् f. [दिशति ददात्यवकाशं दिश्-क्विप्] (Nom. sing. दिक्- ग्)
    1 A direction, cardinal point, point of the compass, quarter of the sky; दिशः प्रसेदुर्मरुतो वबुः सुखाः R.3.14; दिशि दिशि किरति सजलकणजालम् Gīt.4.
    -2 (a) The mere direc- tion of a thing, hint, indication (of the general lines); इति दिक् (often used by commentators &c.); इत्थं लौकिक- शब्दानां दिङ्मात्रमिह दर्शितम् Sk. (b) (Hence) Mode, man- ner, method; मुनेः पाठोक्तदिशा S. D.; दिगियं सूत्रकृता प्रदर्शिता; दासीसभं नृपसभं रक्षःसभमिमा दिशः Ak.
    -3 Region, space, place in general.
    -4 A foreign or distant region.
    -5 A point of view, manner of considering a subject.
    -6 A precept, order.
    -7 The number 'ten'.
    -8 A side or party.
    -9 The mark of a bite. 'दिग्दष्टे वर्तुलाकारे करिका नखरेखिका' इति वैजयन्ती; परिणतदिक्करिकास्तटीर्बिभर्ति Śi.4.29. [N. B. In comp. दिश् becomes दिग् before words beginning with vowels and soft consonants, and दिक् before words beginning with hard consonants; e. g. दिगम्बर, दिग्गज, दिक्पथ, दिक्करिन्, &c.]
    -Comp. -अन्तः end of the direction or horizon, remote distance, remote place; दिगन्ते श्रूयन्ते मदमलिनगण्डाः करटिनः Bv.1.2; Māl.2.9; R.3.4;5.67; 16.87. नानादिगन्तागता राजानः &c.
    -अन्तरम् 1 another direction.
    -2 the intermediate space, atmosphere, space.
    -3 a distant quarter, another or foreign country; संचारपूतानि दिगन्तराणि कृत्वा दिनान्ते निलयाय गन्तुम् R.2.15.
    -अम्बर, -वासस् a. having only the directions for his clothing, stark naked, unclothed; दिगम्बरत्वेन निवेदितं वसु Ku.5.72; एकाकी गृहसंत्यक्तः पाणिपात्रो दिगम्बरः Pt.5.15; Ms.11.21.
    (-रः) 1 a naked mendicant (of the Jaina or Buddha sect.)
    -2 a mendicant, an ascetic.
    -3 an epithet of (1) Śiva; (2) Skanda.
    -4 darkness. (
    -री) an epithet of Durgā.
    -अम्बरकः a naked mendi- cant (of the Jaina sect).
    -अवस्थानम् the air
    - आगत a. Come from a distance; Y.2.254.
    -इभः See दिक्करिन् &c. दिगिभाः पूर्णकलशैः Bhāg.8.8.14;5.14.4.
    -ईशः -ईश्वरः regent of a quarter; चतुर्दिगीशानवमत्य मानिनी Ku.5.53; see अष्टदिक्पाल.
    -कन्या, -कान्ता, -कामिनी, -वधू a region of the sky (considered as a virgin).
    -करः 1 a youth, youthful man.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -करिका, -करी a young girl or woman.
    -करिन्, -गज, -दन्तिन्, -वारणः m. one of the eight elephants said to guard and preside over the eight cardinal points; (see अष्टदिग्गज); दिग्दन्तिशेषाः ककुभश्चकार Vikr.7.1.
    -ग्रहणम्, -बन्धः observation of the quarters of the compass; Bṛi. S.24.9. संपूज्य शारिकांदेवीं दिग्बन्धादिपुरःसरम् Ks.73.116.
    -चक्रम् 1 the horizon; Ratn.3.5.
    -2 the whole world.
    -जयः, -विजयः 'conquest of the directions, the conquest of various countries in all directions, conquest of the world; सुनिश्चितपुरं चक्रे दिग्जये कृतनिश्चयः Rāj. T. 4.183; स दिग्विजयमव्याजवीरः स्मरः इवाकरोत् Vikr.4.1.
    -तटम् the horizon.
    -दर्शनम् 1 showing merely the direction, pointing out only the general mode or manner.
    -2 a general outline or survey.
    -3 a compass.
    -दर्शिन् a. looking on all sides, having a general view.
    -दाहः preternatural redness of the horizon; दैग्दाहः 'a conflagration of the regions of the sky' (regarded as an evil omen) N.12.92; cf. Ms.4.115.
    -देशः 1 a distant region or country; दृश्यन्ते कुलनिम्नगा अपि परं दिग्देशकालाविमौ Rāj. T.4.38,417.
    -2 region, coun- try; H.1.
    -नागः 1 an elephant of the quarter of the compass; see दिग्गज.
    -2 N. of a poet said to be a contemporary of Kālidāsa. (This interpretation is based on Mallinātha's gloss on दिङ्नागानां पथि परिहरन् स्थूल- हस्तावलेपान् Me.14; which is, however, very doubtful.)
    -पतिः, -पालः the regent or guardian of a quarter; Rāj. T.4.225 (for the names of the several regents, see अष्टदिक्पालः cf. Ms.5.96;7.33 also); सूर्यः शुक्रः क्षमापुत्रः सैंहिकेयः शनिः शशी । सौम्यस्त्रिदशमन्त्री च प्राच्यादिदिगधीश्वराः ॥ -Jyotistattvam.
    -पथः the surrounding region; सैन्यैर्नाना- पथायातैर्नदद्भिर्व्याप्तदिक्पथः Rāj. T.5.342.
    -भागः a point of the compass, direction.
    -भ्रमः perplexity about points of the compass, mistaking the way or direction; Vikr.5.66.
    -मण्डलम् = दिक्चक्रम् q.v.
    -मात्रम् the mere direction or indication.
    -मुखम् any quarter or part of the sky; हरति मे हरिवाहनदिङ्मुखम् V.3.6; Amaru.5.
    -मोहः mistaking the way or direction.
    -यात्रा a proces- sion in different directions.
    -वसन, -वस्त्र a. stark naked, unclothed.
    (-स्त्रः) 1 a Jaina or Buddhist mendi- cant of the दिगम्बर class.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -विभा- वित a. renowned or celebrated in all quarters.
    -शूलम् a bad yoga in Astronomy; cf. शुक्रादित्यदिने न वारुणदिशं न ज्ञे कुजे चोत्तरां मन्देन्दोश्च दिने न शक्रककुभं याम्यां गुरौ न व्रजेत् । शूलानीति विलङ्घ्य यान्ति मनुजा ये वित्तलाभाशया भ्रष्टाशाः पुनरापतन्ति यदि ते शुक्रेण तुल्या अपि ॥ Jyotissārasaṅgraha.
    -साधनम् a means to make the journey in various quarters successful.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > दिश् _diś

  • 63 राजन् _rājan

    राजन् m. [राज्-कनिन् रञ्जयति रञ्ज्-कनिन् नि ˚ वा Uṇ.1.145] A king, ruler, prince, chief (changed to राजः at the end of Tat. comp.); वङ्गराजः, महाराजः &c.; तथैव सो$भूदन्वर्थो राजा प्रकृतिरञ्जनात् R.4.12; पित्रा न रञ्जितास्तस्य प्रजास्तेनानु- रञ्जिताः । अनुरागात्ततस्तस्य नाम राजेत्यभाषत ॥ V. P.
    -2 A man of the military casts; a Kṣatriya; Śi 14.14.
    -3 N. of Yudhiṣṭhira.
    -4 N. of Indra.
    -5 The moon; राजप्रियाः कैरविण्यो रमन्ते मधुपैःसह Bv.1.126.
    -6 Lord, master.
    -7 N. of Pṛithu.
    -8 A Yakṣa; तं राजराजानु- चरो$स्य साक्षात् Ki.3.3.
    -9 The Soma plant; ऐन्द्रश्च विधिवद्दत्तो राजा चाभिषुतो$नघः Rām.1.14.6; Bṛi. Up.1.3. 24.
    -Comp. -अग्निः wrath of a king.
    -अङ्गनम् a royal court, the court-yard of a palace.
    -अदनः 1 the Piyāla tree.
    -2 The seed of the tree Chirongia Sapida; राजादनं कन्दरालम् Śiva B.3.15.
    -अधिकारिन्, -अधिकृतः 1 a government officer or official.
    -2 a judge.
    -अधिराजः, -इन्द्रः a king of kings, a supreme king, paramount sovereign, an emperor.
    -अधिष्ठानम् the capital of a king, metropolis.
    -अध्वन् m. a principal or royal road, main street, highway.
    -अनकः 1 an inferior king, a petty prince.
    -2 a title of respect for- merly given to distinguished scholars and poets.
    -अन्नम् 1 rice grown in Āndhra.
    -2 food obtain- ed from a king; राजान्नं तेज आदत्ते Ms.4.218.
    -अपसदः an unworthy or degraded king.
    -अभिषेकः coronation of a king.
    -अम्लः a kind of vegetable plant; Rumex Vesicarius (Mar. चुका).
    -अर्कः Calotropis Gigantea (मन्दार; Mar. रुई).
    -अर्हम् 1 aloewood, a spe- cies of sandal.
    -2 a kind of rice (राजान्न).
    -अर्हणम् a royal gift of honour.
    -अहिः a large snake (having two mouths).
    -आज्ञा a king's edict, an ordinance, a royal decree.
    -आभरणम् a king's ornament.
    -आम्रः a superior kind of mango.
    -आवर्तः a diamond of an in- ferior quality.
    -2 a diamond from Virāṭa country.
    -आवलिः, -ली a royal dynasty or genealogy.
    -आसनम् a throne.
    -आसन्दी Ved. a stand on which the Soma is placed.
    -इन्दुः an excellent king; दिलीप इति राजेन्दुरिन्दुः क्षीरनिधाविव R.1.12.
    -इष्टः a kind of onion. (
    -ष्टम्) = राजान्न q. v.
    -उपकरणम् (pl.) the paraphernalia of a king, the insignia of royalty.
    -उपसेवा royal service; Ms.3.64.
    -ऋषिः (
    राजऋषिः or
    राजर्षिः) a royal sage, a saint-like prince, a man of the Kṣatriya caste who, by his pious life and austere devotion, comes to be regarded as a sage or riṣi; e. g. पुरूरवस्, जनक, विश्वामित्र.
    -कन्या, -कन्यका a princess.
    -करः a tax or tribute paid to the king.
    -करणम् a law-court.
    -कर्णः an ele- phant's tusk.
    -कर्तृ m. a person who assists at a corona- tion; समेत्य राजकर्तारः सभामीयुर्द्विजातयः Rām.2.67.2.
    -कर्मन् n.
    1 the duty of a king.
    -2 royal service; cf. Ms.7.125.
    -कला a crescent of the moon (the 16th part of the moon's disc).
    -कलिः a bad king; cf. अशरण्यः प्रजानां यः स राजा कलिरुच्यते Mb.12.12.29.
    -कार्यम्, -कृत्यम् 1 state-affairs.
    -2 royal command.
    -कुमारः a prince.
    -कुलम् 1 a royal family, a king's family; अग्निरापः स्त्रियो मूर्खः सर्पो राजकुलानि च H.; नदीनां शस्त्रपाणीनां नखिनां शृङ्गिणां तथा । विश्वासो नैव कर्तव्यः स्त्रीषु राजकुलेषु च ॥ ibid.
    -2 the court of a king; आ दास्याः पुत्रि राजकुलं <?>ल्येतत् Nāg.3.12/13.
    -3 a court of justice; (राजकुले कथ् or निविद् caus. means 'to sue one in a court of law, lodge a complaint against).
    -4 a royal palace.
    -5 a king, master (as a respectful mode of speaking).
    -6 a royal servant; बध्नन्ति घ्नन्ति लुम्पन्ति दृप्तं राजकुलानि वै Bhāg. 1.41.36.
    -कोशनिघण्टुः also
    -व्यवहारकोशः N. of a dictionary in Shivaji's time compiled by his minister Raghunātha Paṇḍita.
    -क्षवकः a kind of mustard.
    -गामिन् 1 a. escheating to the sovereign (as the property of a person having no heir).
    -2 brought before the king (as slander); Ms.11.55.
    -गिरिः N. of a mountain in Magadha.
    -गुरुः a royal counsellor.
    -गुह्यम् a royal mystery; राजविद्या राजगुह्यं पवित्रमिदमुत्तमम् Bg.9.2.
    -गृहम् 1 a royal dwelling, royal palace.
    -2 N. of a chief city in Magadha (about 75 or 8 miles from Pāṭali- putra).
    -ग्रीवः a kind of fish.
    -घ a. sharp, hot. (
    -घः) a king-killer, regicide.
    -चिह्नम् 1 insignia of royalty, regalia.
    -2 the stamp on a coin.
    -चिह्नकम् the organ of generation (उपस्थ).
    -जक्ष्मन् = राजयक्ष्मन् q. v.
    -तरङ्गिणी N. of a celebrated historical poem treating of the kings of Kāśmīra by Kalhaṇa.
    -तरुः the कर्णि- कार tree,
    -तालः, ताली the betel-nut tree; राजतालीवनध्वनिः R.
    -दण्डः 1 a king's sceptre.
    -2 royal authority.
    -3 punishment inflicted by a king.
    -4 fine payable to a king.
    -दन्तः (for दन्तानां राजा) the front tooth; राजौ द्विजानामिह राजदन्ताः N.7.46; 'राजन्ते सुतनोर्मनोरमतमास्ते राज- दन्ताः पुरः' (शृङ्गारधनदशतकम् 67).
    -दूतः a king's ambas- sador, an envoy.
    -दृशद् f. the larger or lower mill- stone.
    -देयम्, -भागम् the royal claim, tax; न वृत्त्या परितुष्यन्ति राजदेयं हरन्ति च Mb.12.56.59.
    -दौवारिकः 1 = राजद्वारिकः q. v.
    -2 a royal messenger; Hch.4.
    -द्रोहः high treason, sedition, rebellion.
    -द्रोहिन् m. a traitor.
    -द्वार् f.,
    -द्वारम् the gate of royal palace; राजद्वारे श्मशाने च यस्तिष्ठति स बान्धवः Subhāṣ.
    -द्वारिकः a royal porter.
    -धर्मः 1 a king's duty.
    -2 a law or rule relating to kings (oft. in pl.).
    -धानम्, -धानकम्, -धानिका, -धानी the king's residence, the capital, metropolis, the seat of government; तौ दम्पती स्वां प्रति राजधानीं (प्रस्थापयामास) R.2.7.
    -धान्यम् Panicum Frumentaceum (Mar. सांवा).
    -धामन् n. a royal palace.
    -धुर् f.,
    -धुरा the burden or responsibility of government.
    -नयः, -नीतिः f. admini- stration of a state, administration of government, poli- tics, statesmanship.
    -नामन् m. Trichosanthes Dioeca (Mar. पडवळ).
    -नारायणः (in music) a kind of measure.
    -निघण्टुः N. of a dictionary of Materia Me- dica.
    -नीलम् an emerald.
    -पट्टः 1 a diamond of inferior quality.
    -2 a royal fillet.
    -पट्टिका f. the Chātaka bird.
    -पदम् royalty, sovereignty.
    -पथः, -पद्धतिः f. =
    राजमार्ग q. v.
    -पिण्डः the maintenance given by a king; अवश्यं राजपिण्डस्तैर्निवेश्य इति मे मतिः Mb.3.36.16.
    -पिण्डा a species of date.
    -पुंस् m. a royal servant.
    -पुत्रः 1 a prince.
    -2 a Kṣatriya, a man of the military tribe.
    -3 the planet Mercury.
    -4 N. of a mixed caste.
    -5 a Rajpoot.
    -5 A kind of mango.
    -पुत्रिका 1 a kind of bird.
    -2 Princess.
    -पुत्री 1 a princess.
    -2 a female of the Rajpoota tribe.
    -3 N. of several plants:-- जाती, मालती, कटुतुम्बी &c.
    -4 a kind of perfume (रेणुका).
    -5 a musk rat.
    -6 a kind of metal; also राजपत्नी.
    -पुरम् a royal city.
    -पुरुषः 1 a king's servant.
    -2 a minister.
    -पुष्पः the नागकेसर tree.
    -पूगः a kind of Areca-nut palm; Bhāg.4.6.17.
    -पौरुषिकः a royal servant; Mb.13.126.24.
    -प्रकृतिः a king's minister.
    -प्रसादः royal favour.
    -प्रेष्यः a king's servant. (
    -ष्यम्) royal service (more correctly राजप्रैष्य).
    -फणिञ्झकः an orange tree.
    -वदरम् salt.
    -बीजिन्, -वंश्य a. a scion of royalty, of royal descent.
    -भट्टिका a species of water-fowl.
    -भृतः a king's soldier.
    -भृत्यः 1 a royal servant or minister.
    -2 any public or govern- ment officer.
    -भोगः a king's meal, royal repast.
    -भोग्यम् nutmeg.
    -भौतः a king's fool or jester.
    -मणिः a royal gem.
    -मन्त्रधरः, -मन्त्रिन् m. a king's counsellor.
    -महिषी the chief queen.
    -मार्गः 1 a highway, high road, a royal or main road, principal street.
    -2 the way, me- thod or procedure of kings.
    -मार्तण्डः, -मृगाङ्कः (in music) a kind of measure.
    -माषः a kind of bean.
    -मुद्रा the royal seal.
    -यक्ष्मः, -यक्ष्मन् m. 'consumption of the moon', pulmonary consumption, consumption in general; राजयक्ष्मपरिहानिराययौ कामयानसमवस्थया तुलाम् R.19.5; राजयक्ष्मेव रोगाणां समूहः स महीभृताम् Śi.2.96; (for explana- tion of the word see Malli. thereon, as well as on Śi. 13.29).
    -यानम् a royal vehicle, a palanouin.
    -युध्वन् m.
    1 a king's soldier.
    -2 one who fights with a king; P.III.2.95.
    -योगः 1 a configuration of planets, asterisms &c. at the birth of a man which indicates that he is destined to be a king.
    -2 an easy mode of religious meditation (fit for kings to practise), as dis- tinguished form the more rigorous one called हठयोग q. v.
    -रङ्गम् silver.
    -राक्षसः a bad king.
    -राज् m.
    1 a supreme king.
    -2 the moon.
    -राजः 1 a supreme king, sovereign lord, an emperor.
    -2 N. of Kubera; अन्तर्बाष्प- श्चिरमनुचरो राजराजस्य दध्यौ Me.3.
    -3 the moon.
    -राज्यम् the state or dignity of Kubera; स्वर्लोके राजराज्येन सो$भि- षिच्येत भार्गव Mb.13.85.53.
    -रीतिः f. bell-metal.
    -लक्षणम् 1 any mark on a man's body indicating future royalty. royal insignia, regalia.
    -लक्ष्मन् n. royal insignia. (-m.) N. of Yudhiṣṭhira.
    -लक्ष्मीः, -श्रीः f. the fortune or pros- perity of a king (personified as a goddess), the glory or majesty of a king; स न्यस्तचिह्नामपि राजलक्ष्मीम् R.2.7.
    -लिङ्गम् a kingly mark.
    -लेखः a royal edict.
    -लोकः a. collection of princes or kings.
    -वंशः a dynasty of kings.
    -वंशावली genealogy of kings, royal pedigree.
    -वर्चसम् kingly rank or dignity.
    -वर्तः cloth of various colours.
    -वल्लभः 1 a king's favourite.
    -2 a kind of mango.
    -3 a kind of Jujube.
    -वसतिः 1 dwelling in a king's court.
    -2 a royal palace.
    -वाहः a horse.
    -वाह्यः a royal elephant.
    -विः the bluy jay.
    -विजयः (in music) a kind of Rāga.
    -विद्या 'royal policy', king- craft, state-policy, statesmanship; Bg.9.2; (cf. राजनय); so
    -राजशास्त्रम्; वीराश्च नियतोत्साहा राजशास्त्रमनुष्ठिताः Rām.1. 7.12.
    -विहारः a royal convent.
    -वृक्षः the tree Cassia Fistula; गुच्छैः कृतच्छविरराजत राजवृक्षः Rām. Ch.5.9.
    -वृत्तम् the conduct or occupation of a king; (कच्चित्) प्रजाः पालयसे राजन् राजवृत्तेन धार्मिक Rām.1.52.7.
    -वृत्तिः the works of a king; प्रत्यक्षाप्रत्यक्षानुमेया हि राजवृत्तिः Kau. A.1.9.
    -शफरः a Hilsā fish; L. D. B.
    -शासनम् a royal edict; दिवा चरेयुः कार्यार्थं चिह्निता राजशासनैः Ms.1.55.
    -शृङ्गम् a royal umbrella with a golden handle.
    -शेखरः N. of a poet.
    -संसद् f.,
    -सभा f. a court of justice.
    -सदनम् a palace.
    -सर्पः a kind of snake-devouring snake.
    -सर्षपः black mustard (the seed used as a weight; त्रसरेणवो$ष्टौ विज्ञेया लिक्षैका परिमाणतः । ता राजसर्षपस्तिस्रस्ते त्रयो गौरसर्षपः ॥ Ms.8.133).
    -सायुज्यम् sovereignty.
    -सारसः a peacock.
    -सूयः, -यम् 1 a great sacrifice performed by a universal monarch (in which the tributary princes also took part) at the time of his coronation as a mark of his undisputed sovereignty; राजा वै राजसूयेनेष्ट्वा भवति Śat Br.; cf. सम्राट् also; राजा तत्र सूयते तस्माद् राजसूयः । राज्ञो वा यज्ञो राजसूयः ŚB. on MS.4.4.1.
    -2 a lotus.
    -3 a mountain.
    - सौधः a king's palace.
    -स्कन्धः a horse.
    -स्थानाधिकारः Viceroyalty.
    -स्थानीयः a viceroy, governor.
    -स्वम् 1 royal property; राजस्वं श्रोत्रियस्वं च न भोगेन प्रणश्यति Ms.8.149.
    -2 tribute, revenue.
    -स्वर्णः a kind of thorn-apple.
    -स्वामिन् m. N. of Viṣṇu.
    -हंसः a flamingo (a sort of white goose with red legs and bill); संपत्स्यन्ते नभसि भवतो राजहंसाः सहायाः Me.11; कूजितं राजहंसानां नेदं नूपुरशिञ्जितम् V.
    -हत्या regicide.
    -हस्तिन् m. a royal elephant, i. e. a lordly and handsome elephant.
    -हासकः a kind of fish; L. D. B.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > राजन् _rājan

  • 64 वाक्य


    vākya
    n. (ifc. f. ā) speech, saying, assertion, statement, command, words ( mamavākyāt, in my words, in my name) MBh. etc. etc.;

    a declaration (in law), legal evidence Mn. ;
    an express declñdeclaration orﾠ statement (opp. to liṅga, « a hint» orﾠ indication) Sarvad. ;
    betrothment Nār. ;
    a sentence, period RāmatUp. Pāṇ. Vārtt. etc.;
    a mode of expression Cat. ;
    a periphrastic mode of expression Pāṇ. Sch. Siddh. ;
    a rule, precept, aphorism MW. ;
    a disputation MBh. ;
    (in logic) an argument, syllogism orﾠ member of a syllogism;
    the singing of birds Hariv. ;
    (in astron.) the solar process in computations MW.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > वाक्य

  • 65 haben;

    hat, hatte, hat gehabt
    I v/t
    1. (Arbeit, Erfahrung, Geld, Zeit etc.) have (got); (besitzen) auch possess, own; haben wollen (wünschen) want (to have); (fordern) want, demand; die Erlaubnis / das Recht haben zu (+ Inf.) have permission / the right to (+ Inf.) woher hast du das? where did you get that (from)?; (Nachricht etc.) where did you hear that?; kann ich mal das Salz haben? umg. could I have the salt, please?; da hast du’s! umg. there you are; zu haben Ware: available; Haus: for sale; ist es noch zu haben? auch is it still going (Am. up for sale)?; sie ist noch zu haben umg., fig. she’s not spoken for, she’s (still) available, she’s (still) single; dafür bin ich nicht zu haben fig. you can count me out; generell: that’s not (really) my thing; für ein Bier bin ich immer zu haben fig. I’m always game for a beer; er hat schon viele Frauen gehabt umg., euph. he’s already had a lot of women; wer hat, der hat! umg., hum. oder iro. if you’ve got it, flaunt it; was man hat, das hat man a bird in the hand (is worth two in the bush) Sprichw., possession is nine points ( oder tenths) of the law; er hat’s ja! umg. he can afford it; haste
    2. (Eigenschaft, Krankheit, Unfall, Zustand etc.) have (got); welche Farbe haben seine Augen? what colo(u)r are his eyes?; Glück / Pech haben be lucky / unlucky; einen Motorschaden haben have engine trouble; es im Hals haben umg. have a sore throat; er hat Geburtstag it’s his birthday; gestern hatten wir Regen we had rain yesterday, it rained here yesterday; hast du heute Dienst / Schule / frei? are you on duty / have you got school / are you off today?; Mathe haben wir bei Herrn Hanel Mr Hanel takes us for math(s), Am. We have math with Mr. Hanel; in der vierten Stunde haben wir Physik we’ve got physics (in the) fourth period ( oder lesson); in Erdkunde haben wir gerade China we’re doing China in geography at the moment; da hast du’s! (siehst du?) I told you so
    3. (fühlen): Angst / Durst etc. haben be afraid / thirsty etc.; Schmerzen haben be in pain, have a pain Sg.; was hast du denn? umg. what’s up ( oder wrong)?; hast du was? umg. is something the matter?
    4. (bestehen aus) comprise, be made up of, consist of; (wiegen) weigh; (messen) measure; der Fisch hat zwei Kilo / zwanzig Zentimeter the fish weighs two kilos / is 20 centimet|res (Am. -ers) long; ein Kilogramm hat tausend Gramm there are a thousand grams in a kilogram; der Verein hat 20 Mitglieder the club has 20 members; Deutschland hat 16 Bundesländer Germany is made up of 16 states
    5. Zeitangabe: wir haben ( jetzt) April / genau sechs Uhr / Montag, den 7.11. it’s April / six o’clock precisely / Monday 7 November (Am. November 7th); wie viel Uhr haben wir? what time is it?; in New York haben sie jetzt Nacht it’s nighttime in New York at the moment
    6. umg. als Brauch, Mode: das hat man jetzt so / wieder / nicht mehr Brauch: it’s what we do nowadays / we’ve gone back to doing it this way / we don’t do it like that any more; Mode: it’s the fashion / back in fashion / out of fashion now
    7. unpers., bes. südd., österr., schw.: es hat there is / are; wie viel Grad hat es ( draußen)? what’s the temperature (outside)?; dieses Jahr hat es wenig Pilze there aren’t very many mushrooms this year; was hat’s bei euch für Wetter? what sort of weather are you having?, what’s the weather like where you are?
    8. umg. (beendet, bekommen, gemacht etc. haben): hast du den Abwasch schon? have you finished washing up (yet)? (Am. finished the dishes [yet]?); hat man den Dieb schon? have they caught the thief yet?; hab ich dich endlich! (erwischt) got you!, gotcha! umg.; das werden wir gleich haben! no problem; bei Reparatur etc.: we’ll have that done ( oder fixed) in no time; ich hab’s bald (I’m) nearly finished; hast du’s bald? ungeduldig: how much longer are you going to take?; ich hab’s oder jetzt hab ich’s! (I’ve) got it!; hast du schon Nachricht von ihr? - Nein, hab ich nicht! have you heard from her yet? - No, I haven’t; was hast du in Mathe? Note: what did you get in math(s)?; dich hat’s wohl! oder hat’s dich jetzt ganz? (spinnst du?) you must be mad (Am. crazy)!, you’re off your head
    9. mit es und Adj.: du hast’s gut you’ve got it good umg., everything’s fine for you; ich hab’s eilig I’m in a hurry; schön habt ihr es hier it’s lovely for you here; jetzt haben wir’s nicht mehr weit not far to go now; sie will es so haben that’s the way she wants it; wie hätten Sie’s denn gern(e)? how would you like it?
    10. mit zu und Inf.: nichts / viel zu essen haben have nothing / a lot to eat; einen Brief zu schreiben haben have a letter to write; ich habe noch Geld von ihr zu bekommen I still have some money to come ( oder coming) from her, she still owes me some money; du hast hier / mir ( gar) nichts zu befehlen oder sagen / verbieten it’s not up to you to tell people / me what to do / what not to do; was hast du hier zu suchen? (verschwinde!) what are you doing here?
    11. mit Verben: wo hast du dein Auto ( stehen)? where did you leave your car?; einen Läufer vor dem Bett ( liegen) haben have a rug in front of the bed; etw. nicht haben können umg. (nicht ertragen, mögen) not be able to stand s.th.; das kann ich nicht haben! I can’t stand it; auf etwas Spezifisches reagierend: I’m not standing for that
    12. mit Präp.: eine Frau / einen Italiener als oder zum Chef haben have a woman / an Italian as one’s boss; ich habe an ihm einen Freund I have a friend in him; ich merke erst jetzt, was ich an ihr gehabt habe it’s only now that I can appreciate what I had in her (bzw. what an asset oder a treasure oder a wonderful woman she was); er hat etwas Überspanntes an sich there’s something eccentric about him; das haben Katzen so an sich that’s just the way cats are; was hat es damit auf sich? what’s it all about?, what does it mean?; es hat nichts auf sich ( damit) it’s nothing; bei sich haben (Geld, Ausweis etc.) have on ( oder with) one; (Person) have with one; es hat viel für sich there’s a lot to be said for it; was hast du gegen ihn? what have you got against him?; ich hab nichts gegen Raucher I have nothing against people who smoke; jetzt hätte ich nichts gegen ein Nickerchen I wouldn’t mind a little nap now; sie hatte alle gegen sich she had everyone against her; hinter sich (Dat) haben (etw.) have been through s.th.; (jemanden) have s.o. behind one; das hätten wir hinter uns well, that’s that; einen anstrengenden Tag hinter sich (Dat) haben have had a tiring day; die fünfzig hinter sich (Dat) haben be over 50, be the wrong side of 50; die Sache hat es in sich umg. it’s not easy, it’s a tough one; der Likör hat es in sich it’s a pretty strong liqueur; hat sie was mit ihm? umg. is there something going on between them?; hat er es schon mit ihr gehabt? umg. has he had it ( oder done it) with her?; ich hab’s nicht (so) mit ihr / mit Pizza umg. I don’t like ( oder get on [Am. along] with) her / I don’t go for ( oder I’m not into) pizza; die hat’s vielleicht mit i-r Ordnung! umg. she’s got a real thing about tidiness; damit hat es ( noch) Zeit oder keine Eile there’s (still) plenty of time for that, there’s no hurry for that (yet); unter sich (Dat) haben be in charge of; (befehligen) command; er hat viel von seinem Vater he takes after his father; er hat etwas von einem Versager etc. he’s a bit of a quitter; wenn du so viel arbeitest, haben wir gar nichts mehr von dir we’ll never see anything of you; wir haben nicht viel von unserem Urlaub gehabt we didn’t get much out of our holiday; was habe ich davon? umg. what do I get out of it?, what for?; das hast du jetzt davon! umg. see?; das hast du davon, wenn... umg. that’s what you get when... ( oder from [+ Ger.]); das haben wir noch vor uns that’s still to come, we’ve still got that to come; Sie wissen wohl nicht, wen Sie vor sich haben? you obviously don’t know who(m) you’re addressing; jemanden zum Feind / Freund haben have s.o. as an enemy / friend; Anschein, Auge 1, gehabt, gern etc.
    II v/i mit zu und Inf.: zu arbeiten / gehorchen etc. haben (müssen) have to work / obey etc.; ich hab zu tun I’ve got things to do; du hast gut lachen / reden you may well laugh / talk
    III v/refl umg.: hab dich nicht so! don’t make such a fuss; (führ dich nicht so auf) don’t take (Am. carry) on like that; der hat sich vielleicht mit seinen Büchern! he makes such a fuss about his books!; und damit hat sich’s! and that’s that, and that’s final; es hat sich was damit it’s not that easy; hat sich was! some hope!
    IV Hilfsv. have; hast du ihn gesehen? have you seen him?; ich habe bis jetzt gelesen I have been reading up to now; er hat uns gestern besucht he visited us yesterday; du hättest es mir sagen sollen you should have told me; er hätte es machen können he could have done it

    Deutsch-Englisch Wörterbuch > haben;

  • 66 команда изменения параметров

    Computers: mode command

    Универсальный русско-английский словарь > команда изменения параметров

  • 67 stille

    adjust, dumb, dump, pose, position, put, quell, quiet, quietly, regulate, put right, set, silent, slack, stand, station, still
    * * *
    I. (et)
    ( modsat storm) calm ( fx after a storm comes a calm).
    II. adj
    ( ubevægelig) still ( fx he sat (, lay) still; the air is still);
    ( rolig) quiet ( fx evening, street, village),
    ( om vejr, vand) calm ( fx evening, weather),
    (F: især om dybere ro) tranquil;
    ( uden støj, tavs) silent, quiet;
    (merk) slack, dull, quiet;
    adv quietly, calmly, silently, still;
    [ stille!] be quiet! hush!
    ( i forsamling) silence!
    (dvs hemmeligt) secretly,
    T on the quiet;
    [ liste af lige så stille] slip away quietly;
    [ så stille som en mus] as quiet as a mouse;
    [ med vb:]
    [ dø en stille død, dø stille] die (el. pass away) peacefully;
    (fig) let something die (quietly);
    [ gå stille med], se gå;
    [ holde stille] stop,
    F halt,
    ( være standset) be standing (still);
    [ holde sig stille] keep still;
    [ han hører til de stille i landet] he says very little; he belongs to the silent majority;
    [ ligge stille] lie still; be quiet;
    ( om forretning, produktion etc) be at a standstill;
    ( om fabrik) be idle;
    [ stå stille] stand still;
    (om virksomhed etc), se ovf: ligge stille;
    (om vand etc) stagnate;
    (dvs af forfærdelse etc) one's (el. the) mind boggles;
    (dvs han anede ikke hvad han skulle gøre) he was at his wit's end;
    [ luften stod stille] there was not a breath of air;
    [ tie stille], se tie;
    [ med sb:]
    [ en stille tid] a period of quiet,
    (merk) a slack period;
    [ en stille tvivl] a secret doubt;
    [ den stille uge] Holy Week;
    [ det stille vand har den dybe grund] still waters run deep;
    [ stille vejr] calm weather.
    III. vb
    ( tilfredsstille) satisfy ( fx one's hunger);
    ( tørst) quench, slake;
    ( lindre, F) allay, alleviate.
    IV. vb
    ( anbringe) put,
    (mere F, mere omhyggeligt: anbringe) place,
    (mindre alm) set ( fx the vase on the table);
    ( anbringe i lodret stilling, også) stand ( fx he stood the gun against the wall);
    ( skaffe) supply,
    F furnish ( fx a witness),
    ( om penge også) find ( fx £500);
    ( indfinde sig) present oneself,
    T turn up;
    (mil., = melde sig) report,
    ( møde) muster;
    [ stille lige], se III. lige;
    (se også stillet);
    [ med sb:]
    (dvs at løse) set somebody a problem,
    (dvs et hverv at udføre) set somebody a task;
    [ stille et ur] set a watch (, a clock) ( efter by, fx set one's watch by the time signal);
    [stille uret til at vække kl. 7] set the alarm for 7 o'clock;
    (se også betingelse, depositum, fordring, I. fælde, horoskop, krav,
    [ med sig:]
    [ stille sig] place oneself,
    (for at passe på etc) station oneself ( fx in front of the door),
    ( som kandidat) stand (, am: run) (as candidate),
    ( indtage en vis holdning) take up an attitude ( fx take up a
    friendly attitude),
    (se også afventende);
    [ hvordan vil han stille sig?] what will be his attitude?
    [ stille sig en opgave] set oneself a task;
    [ stille sig an] strike an attitude (el. a pose),
    ( generelt) strike attitudes, attitudinize,
    F posture;
    [ stille sig an som om man er syg] pretend to be ill;
    (fig: støtte) back up ( fx a person, a statement),
    (om erklæring etc også, F) endorse,
    (om politik etc også) identify oneself with;
    [ stille sig i kø] queue up;
    (se også I. spids);
    [ stille sig op] place oneself, take (up) one's position,
    (for at passe på etc) station oneself, plant oneself, take one's stand;
    ( om flere: samle sig) collect ( fx people collected in front of the palace), gather,
    ( i en række) line up,
    ( i kø) queue up;
    [ tusinder af mennesker havde stillet sig op langs ruten] thousands of people lined the route;
    [ stille sig på hans side] side with him;
    [ sagen stiller sig således] the facts are these;
    [ hvordan stiller han sig til sagen?] what is his attitude to the matter? what are his views on the matter?
    [ stille sig under éns kommando] place oneself under somebody's command
    (el. orders);
    [ med præp & adv:]
    [ blive stillet for en dommer] be brought before a judge;
    [ stille ham for retten] put him on trial;
    [ stille frem] set out,
    ( til skue) display,
    ( et ur) put forward, put on;
    [ stille én frit] give somebody a free hand;
    [ det stiller os gunstigere] it leaves us in a better position;
    [ stille hos én] report to somebody;
    [ stille i], se bero, I. lys, relief, I. spids, udsigt etc;
    ( radio) tune (in);
    ( om kikkert, kanon) train on;
    [ stille ind på en station] tune in to a station;
    (tlf) put the call through to him,
    ( flytte den) transfer the call to him;
    ( på radio) switch on to,
    ( under transmission) switch (el. go) over to,
    (tlf), se ovf: stille ind til;
    ( uden objekt: i rækker, også mil.) form up ( fx the schoolchildren had to form up before entering the school),
    (se også ovf: stille sig op);
    ( til valg) stand,
    (især am) run ( fx run for President);
    (= gøre) do ( fx what shall I do with them? he did not know what to do with himself; there is nothing to be done about it);
    [ stille op mod en mur] put up against a wall ( fx he put the ladder up against the wall; he should be put up against a wall and shot),
    ( om flere) line up against a wall;
    [ stille op som] put (oneself) up as ( fx treasurer),
    (parl) stand as ( fx an Independent);
    [ blive stillet over for] be faced with (el. by);
    [ stille ham over for] face him with ( fx a challenge, a choice, a problem),
    F confront him with ( fx a challenge, a problem);
    [ stille på en skrue] adjust a screw;
    (se også I. prøve);
    [ stille noget til ens disposition] place something at somebody's disposal;
    [ stille tilbage] put back;
    [ stille noget under éns beskyttelse] place something under somebody's protection.

    Danish-English dictionary > stille

  • 68 medio

    adj.
    1 half a, half, half an, mid.
    2 average.
    3 half-way, halfway.
    4 one-half.
    adv.
    half-way, half, kind of, partially.
    m.
    1 means, manner, mode, way.
    2 center, midway, midst.
    3 medium, instrument, means.
    4 environment.
    5 halfback.
    6 medium.
    pres.indicat.
    1st person singular (yo) present indicative of spanish verb: mediar.
    * * *
    1 (mitad) half
    2 (intermedio) middle
    3 (de promedio) average
    ■ una velocidad media de... an average speed of...
    1 half
    ■ medio terminado,-a half-finished
    1 (mitad) half
    2 (centro) middle
    3 (contexto - físico) environment
    4 (social) circle
    1 (recursos) means
    \
    equivocarse de medio a medio to get it all wrong
    estar (todo) por el medio to be in the way
    ponerse en medio to get in the way
    por medio de through, by means of
    por todos los medios by all means
    quitar algo/alguien de en medio to get something/somebody out of the way
    media aritmética arithmetic mean
    medio ambiente environment
    medio fondo middle-distance
    medios de transporte means of transport
    ————————
    1 (mitad) half
    2 (centro) middle
    3 (contexto - físico) environment
    4 (social) circle
    * * *
    1. (f. - media)
    adj.
    2) half
    2. adv.
    1) half
    3. noun m.
    •
    * * *
    1. ADJ
    1) (=la mitad de) half

    media pensión — [en hotel] half-board

    • media hora — half an hour

    • media luna — (Astron) half-moon

    la Media Luna — [en el Islam] the Crescent

    asta, luz 1), mundo 2), naranja 1., 3), palabra 1), voz 1), vuelta 1)
    2) (=intermedio)

    • a medio camino, estamos a medio camino — we're halfway there

    plazo
    3) (=promedio) average
    término 2)
    4) (=normal) average
    5)

    • a medias, lo dejó hecho a medias — he left it half-done

    lo pagamos a medias — we share o split the cost

    2. ADV
    1) [con adjetivo] half

    es medio tonto — he's not very bright, he's a bit on the slow side

    2) [con verbo, adverbio]

    está a medio escribir/terminar — it is half-written/finished

    3) LAm (=bastante) rather, quite, pretty *
    3. SM
    1) (=centro) middle, centre, center (EEUU)

    • de en medio, la casa de en medio — the middle house

    • de por medio, hay droga de por medio — drugs are involved

    día (de) por medio — LAm every other day

    • en medio, iba a besarla, pero él se puso en medio — I was going to kiss her, but he got between us

    • por medio de, pasar por medio de — to go through (the middle of)

    de medio a medio —

    2) (Dep) midfielder

    medio apertura — (Rugby) fly-half

    medio (de) melé — (Rugby) scrum-half

    3) (=método) means pl, way

    no hay medio de conseguirlo — there is no way of getting it, it's impossible to get

    poner todos los medios para hacer algo, no regatear medios para hacer algo — to spare no effort to do sth

    • por medio de, se mueve por medio de poleas — it moves by means of o using a pulley system

    respira por medio de las agallas — it breathes through o using o by means of its gills

    4) pl los medios (tb: los medios de comunicación ó difusión) the media
    5) pl medios (=recursos) means, resources
    6) (Bio) (tb: medio ambiente) environment
    7) (=círculo) circle
    * * *
    I
    - dia adjetivo

    medio litro — half a liter, a half-liter

    media hora — half an hour, a half hour (AmE)

    a media mañana/tarde dio un paseo — he went for a mid-morning/mid-afternoon stroll

    2) (mediano, promedio) average

    el ciudadano/mexicano medio — the average citizen/Mexican

    II
    adverbio half

    está medio loca/dormida — she's half crazy/asleep

    III
    1) (Mat) ( mitad) half
    2)
    a) ( centro) middle

    el asiento de en or del medio — the middle seat, the seat in the middle

    quitarse de en or del medio — to get out of the way

    quitar a alguien de en medio — (euf) to bump somebody off (colloq)

    b) los medios masculino plural (Taur) center* ( of the ring)
    3)
    a) (recurso, manera) means (pl)

    no hay medio de localizarlo — there's no way o means of locating him

    b) (Art) ( vehículo) tb
    c) medios masculino plural ( recursos económicos) tb

    medios económicos — means (pl), resources (pl)

    de por medio: no puedo dejarlo, están los niños de por medio I can't leave him, there are the children to think of; hay intereses creados de por medio there are vested interests involved; había un árbol de por medio there was a tree in the way; en medio de: en medio de tanta gente (in) among so many people; cómo puedes trabajar en medio de este desorden how can you work in all this mess; en medio de la confusión in o amid all the confusion; en medio de todo all things considered; por medio (CS, Per): día/semana por medio every other day/week; dos o tres casas por medio every two or three houses; por medio de by means of; se comunicaban por medio de este sistema they communicated by means of this system; por medio de tu primo from o through your cousin; de medio a medio: te equivocas de medio a medio you're completely wrong; le acertó de medio a medio — she was absolutely right

    5)
    a) (círculo, ámbito)

    en medios literarios/políticos — in literary/political circles

    en medios bien informados se comenta que... — informed opinion has it that...

    b) (Biol) environment
    •
    * * *
    I
    - dia adjetivo

    medio litro — half a liter, a half-liter

    media hora — half an hour, a half hour (AmE)

    a media mañana/tarde dio un paseo — he went for a mid-morning/mid-afternoon stroll

    2) (mediano, promedio) average

    el ciudadano/mexicano medio — the average citizen/Mexican

    II
    adverbio half

    está medio loca/dormida — she's half crazy/asleep

    III
    1) (Mat) ( mitad) half
    2)
    a) ( centro) middle

    el asiento de en or del medio — the middle seat, the seat in the middle

    quitarse de en or del medio — to get out of the way

    quitar a alguien de en medio — (euf) to bump somebody off (colloq)

    b) los medios masculino plural (Taur) center* ( of the ring)
    3)
    a) (recurso, manera) means (pl)

    no hay medio de localizarlo — there's no way o means of locating him

    b) (Art) ( vehículo) tb
    c) medios masculino plural ( recursos económicos) tb

    medios económicos — means (pl), resources (pl)

    de por medio: no puedo dejarlo, están los niños de por medio I can't leave him, there are the children to think of; hay intereses creados de por medio there are vested interests involved; había un árbol de por medio there was a tree in the way; en medio de: en medio de tanta gente (in) among so many people; cómo puedes trabajar en medio de este desorden how can you work in all this mess; en medio de la confusión in o amid all the confusion; en medio de todo all things considered; por medio (CS, Per): día/semana por medio every other day/week; dos o tres casas por medio every two or three houses; por medio de by means of; se comunicaban por medio de este sistema they communicated by means of this system; por medio de tu primo from o through your cousin; de medio a medio: te equivocas de medio a medio you're completely wrong; le acertó de medio a medio — she was absolutely right

    5)
    a) (círculo, ámbito)

    en medios literarios/políticos — in literary/political circles

    en medios bien informados se comenta que... — informed opinion has it that...

    b) (Biol) environment
    •
    * * *
    medio1
    = middle, one-half (1/2).

    Ex: The purpose of the insert key is to allow the insertion of one or more characters in the middle of a field without disturbing the information already displayed.

    Ex: The output of paperbacks accounted for one-third of the total US book production by 1962; nearly one-half of the fiction produced and a quarter of the available titles.
    * Alta Edad Media, la = Early Middle Ages, the, High Middle Ages, the, Dark Ages, the.
    * a media asta = at half-mast, at half staff.
    * a media mañana = mid-morning.
    * a medias entre... y... = betwixt and between.
    * a medio abrir = half-opened.
    * a medio camino = halfway [half-way/half way].
    * a medio comprender = half-understood.
    * a medio formar = half-formed.
    * a medio fuego = medium heat.
    * a medio hacer = halfway done, half done.
    * a medio plazo = near-term, in the medium term, medium-term, in the mid-term, mid-term [midterm].
    * a medio rimar = half-rhymed.
    * a medio vestir = partly dressed, half dressed.
    * arco de medio punto = round arch.
    * baja Edad Media, la = late Middle Ages, the.
    * barba de media tarde = five o'clock shadow.
    * clase media = middle class.
    * cocer a medias = parboil.
    * comprendido a medias = half-understood.
    * dar media vuelta = do + an about-face.
    * darse media vuelta = turn on + Posesivo + heel.
    * de la edad media = dark-age.
    * del medio = middle.
    * del Medio Oriente = Middle Eastern.
    * de media jornada = half-day [half day].
    * de media mañana = mid-morning.
    * de medio día de duración = half-day [half day].
    * de medio pelo = small-time.
    * de talla media = middle-sized.
    * dividir por medio = rend in + two.
    * Edad Media = mediaeval ages [medieval ages, -USA], Middle Ages.
    * edición media = medium edition.
    * en el nivel medio de = in the middle range of.
    * en medio de = amidst, in the midst of, in the throes of, right in, amid.
    * entender a medias = pick up + the fag-ends.
    * enterarse a medias = pick up + the fag-ends.
    * entre medias = in between.
    * estar a medio camino entre... y... = lie + midway between... and....
    * estar en medio de = caught in the middle.
    * estar justo en medio de = stand + squarely in.
    * foto de medio cuerpo = mugshot [mug shot].
    * haber dinero de por medio = money + change hands.
    * haber una transacción económica de por medio = money + change hands.
    * habitante del Medio Oriente = Middle Easterner.
    * histeria a medias = semi-hysteria.
    * Hora + y media = half past + Hora.
    * IME (Integración a Media Escala) = MSI (Medium Scale Integration).
    * justo en el medio (de) = plumb in the middle (of).
    * letra rota o a medio imprimir = broken letter.
    * línea de medio campo = halfway line.
    * media docena = half a dozen, half-dozen.
    * media hora = half-hour.
    * Media Luna Roja, la = Red Crescent, the.
    * media luz = half-light.
    * media pensión = half board.
    * media tinta = Mezzotint.
    * media verdad = half truth, half-fact.
    * media vuelta = about-face.
    * medio abierto = half-opened, half-way open.
    * medio administrativo = quasi-clerical.
    * medio adormilado = bleary-eyed.
    * medio despierto = drowsily, groggily, bleary-eyed.
    * medio día = one-half day.
    * medio dormido = drowsily, groggily, groggy [groggier -comp., groggiest -sup.].
    * medio en broma = tongue-in-cheek.
    * medio + Expresión Temporal = half + a + Expresión Temporal.
    * medio hecho = halfway done, half done.
    * Medio Oeste, el = Midwest, the.
    * Medio Oriente = Middle East.
    * medio pliego = half-sheet.
    * medio sumergido = half-submerged.
    * medio vacío = half-empty.
    * medio vestido = partly dressed, half dressed.
    * nacido en medio = middleborn.
    * nivel medio de gestión = middle management.
    * pantalones de media caña = knee breeches, jodhpurs.
    * partir por medio = rend in + two.
    * Pasado = half + Pasado/Participio.
    * ponerse en medio = get in + the way (of).
    * Posesivo + media naranja = Posesivo + significant other, Posesivo + better half, Posesivo + other half.
    * punto medio = mid-point.
    * quedarse a medias = fall (between/through) + the cracks.
    * quitarse de en medio = take + Nombre + out.
    * quitarse del medio = run for + cover.
    * sin obstáculos de por medio = uncluttered.
    * tener un problema medio resuelto = have + problem half licked.
    * tentempié de media mañana = elevenses.
    * un día y medio = one and a half days.
    * verdad a medias = half truth, half-fact.
    * verse en medio de = caught in the middle.

    medio2
    2 = average, mainline, mainstream.

    Ex: The average family does have very real information needs, even though these may not be immediately recognized as such.

    Ex: This is 'scientific journalism' at its worst, but its standards are not wholly different from those of the mainline press.
    Ex: Some children may be constrained by a mainstream curriculum that does not match their ability level.
    * ciudadano medio, el = average man, the.
    * como término medio = on average.
    * de nivel cultural medio = middlebrow [middle-brow].
    * de nivel medio = medium level [medium-level], middle-range.
    * de precio medio = medium-priced.
    * de talle medio = medium-length.
    * de tamaño medio = medium-sized, mid-sized [midsized], middle-sized, mid-size [midsize].
    * de tipo medio = middle-range.
    * el ciudadano medio = the average Joe.
    * hombre medio, el = average person, the.
    * la ciudadana media = the average Jane.
    * nivel de dominio medio = working knowledge.
    * persona con nivel cultural medio = middlebrow [middle-brow].
    * por término medio = on average.
    * precio medio = average price.
    * tener por término medio = average.
    * término medio = compromise, balance.
    * valor medio = midrange, mean value.

    medio3
    3 = instrumentality, means, vehicle.

    Ex: But there are signs of a change as new and powerful instrumentalities come into use.

    Ex: The easiest means of illustrating some of the foregoing points is to introduce in outline some special classification schemes.
    Ex: This journal serves as a vehicle for the continuing education of librarians, as a showcase for current practice and as a spotlight for significant activities.
    * alfabetización en los medios de comunicación = media literacy.
    * anuncios en los medios de comunicación = media releases.
    * aprendizaje a través de medios electrónicos = online learning.
    * aprendizaje por medio del ordenador = computer-based learning (CBL).
    * bibliotecario de medios audiovisuales = library media specialist.
    * bien dotado de medios = well-resourced.
    * bien equipado de medios = well-resourced.
    * búsqueda por medio de menús = menu-assisted searching.
    * búsqueda por medio de órdenes = command search.
    * codificación por medio de códigos de barras = barcoding [bar-coding].
    * codificar por medio de códigos de barras = barcode [bar-code].
    * conducir por medio de tubos = duct.
    * confundir los medios con el fin = confuse + the means with the ends.
    * con medios insuficientes = on a shoestring (budget).
    * con medios muy escasos = on a shoestring (budget).
    * con medios muy exiguos = on a shoestring (budget).
    * con muy pocos medios = on a shoestring (budget).
    * con todos los medios a + Posesivo + alcance = with all the means at + Posesivo + disposal.
    * desplazamiento por medio del ordenador = computer commuting.
    * documentalista de los medios de comunicación = news librarian.
    * dotar de medios = resource.
    * el fin justifica los medios = the end justifies the means.
    * empresa de medios de comunicación = media company.
    * enseñanza a través de medios electrónicos = online education.
    * enseñanza por medio del ordenador (CBI) = computer-based instruction (CBI).
    * entrevista en los medios de comunicación = media interview.
    * equipar de medios = resource.
    * exceso de medios = overkill.
    * expansión de una búsqueda por medio del tesauro = thesaurus expansion.
    * industria de los medios de comunicación de masas = mass communications industry.
    * interfaz por medio de gráficos = graphics interfacing.
    * máquina de registro de préstamos por medio de la fotografía = photocharger, photocharging machine.
    * medio de ahorro = economy measure.
    * medio de almacenamiento = storage medium.
    * medio de almacenamiento físico = physical storage media.
    * medio de comunicación = medium [media, -pl.].
    * medio de interpretación = medium of performance.
    * medio de transmisión = conduit.
    * medio físico = physical medium.
    * medios = ways and means.
    * medios de almacenamiento digital = digital media.
    * medios de almacenamiento óptico = optical storage media.
    * medios de comunicación = news media.
    * medios de comunicación de masas = mass media, mass communications media, communications media, communications media.
    * medios de comunicación social = mass media.
    * medios de microalmacenamiento de la información = microstorage media.
    * medios de producción = means of production.
    * medios digitalizados de almacenamiento de información = digitised media.
    * medios económicos = economic resources.
    * medios, los = wherewithal, the, means, the.
    * medios oficiales = official channels.
    * medios técnicos = IT capabilities.
    * medios visuales = visual media.
    * mostrar por medio de cambio de intensidad en el brillo = flash up.
    * multimedia = multimedia [multi-media].
    * mundo de los medios de comunicación, el = mediascape, the.
    * por medio = out of.
    * por medio de = by means of, by way of, in the form of, through, via, via the medium of, by dint of.
    * por medio de isótopos = isotopically.
    * por medio de otro(s) = by proxy.
    * por medio de una agencia = on a bureau basis.
    * por todos los medios = by all means.
    * proporcionar los medios para = provide + the material for.
    * ser un medio para llegar a un fin = be the means to an end.
    * streaming media = streaming media.
    * técnica de recuperación por medio de la lógica difusa = fuzzy IR technique.
    * terapia por medio de aromas = aroma therapy.
    * tratar por todos los medios de = take + (great) pains to.
    * tratar por todos los medios de + Verbo = be at pains to + Infinitivo.
    * un medio para alcanzar un fin = a means to an end.
    * un medio para conseguir un fin = a means to an end.
    * un medio para llegar a fin = a means to an end.
    * utilizar al máximo por medio del ordenador = explode.

    * * *
    (la mitad de): medio litro half a liter, a half-liter
    medio kilo de harina half a kilo of flour
    media docena de huevos half a dozen eggs, a half-dozen eggs
    ¿quieres media manzana? do you want half an apple?
    los niños pagan medio billete or pasaje children pay half fare o half price
    un retrato de medio cuerpo a half-length portrait
    llevo media hora esperando I've been waiting for half an hour
    la última media hora es muy divertida the last half hour is very entertaining
    hay trenes a y cinco y a y media there are trains at five past and half past (the hour)
    aún faltan dos horas y media para que empiece la función there are still two and a half hours to go before the show starts
    si se lo dices a él mañana lo sabe medio Buenos Aires if you tell him, half (of) Buenos Aires will know by tomorrow
    la bandera ondea a media asta the flag is flying at half-mast
    la falda le llega a media pierna she's wearing a calf-length skirt
    a media mañana/tarde siempre da un paseo he always goes for a mid-morning/mid-afternoon stroll, he always goes for a stroll mid-morning/mid-afternoon
    ¿qué haces aquí leyendo a media luz? what are you doing in here reading in such poor light?
    la habitación estaba a media luz the room was dimly lit
    Compuestos:
    habla con or (CS) en medioa lengua he talks in baby language
    la deliciosa medioa lengua de los dos años the delightful way a two-year-old talks
    A ( Astron) half-moon
    en forma de medioa luna crescent-shaped
    B (de las uñas) half-moon
    C ( RPl) ( Coc) croissant ( often with ham and cheese)
    D
    (organización): la Medioa Luna Roja the Red Crescent
    feminine short sleeve
    llevaba un vestido de medioa manga she was wearing a dress with short sleeves o a short-sleeved dress
    todavía no ha encontrado su medioa naranja (el hombre ideal) Mr Right hasn't come along yet; (la mujer ideal) he hasn't found his ideal woman yet
    vino con su medioa naranja he/she came along with his/her better half ( colloq hum)
    (en colegios): los alumnos en régimen de medioa pensión pupils who have school dinners
    fpl:
    me lo dijo con medioas palabras she didn't say it in so many words
    feminine half sole, sole
    feminine half volley
    a medioa voz in a low voice
    hablaban a medioa voz they were talking in low voices
    feminine ( Mil) about-face ( AmE), about-turn ( BrE)
    (se) dio medioa vuelta y se fue she turned on her heel o she turned around and left
    masculine and feminine fly half, outside half
    masculine midfield
    masculine and feminine middle-distance runner
    masculine middle-distance
    ● medio hermano, media hermana
    masculine, feminine
    ( masculine) half-brother; ( feminine) half-sister
    masculine half-mourning
    ● medio pupilo, media pupila or medio pupila
    masculine, feminine (CS) day pupil
    los medio pupilos the day pupils
    ( AmL) half-time
    B (mediano, promedio) average
    el cuidadano/mexicano medio the average citizen/Mexican
    barrios madrileños de standing alto a medio middle to upper-class districts of Madrid
    a medio y largo plazo in the medium and long term
    técnico de grado medio technician who has taken a three-year course rather than a five-year degree course
    la temperatura media es de 22 grados the average temperature is 22 degrees
    clase1 (↑ clase (1)), edad, término, etc
    C
    1
    (de manera incompleta): dejó el trabajo a medios he left the work half-finished
    me dijo la verdad a medios she didn't tell me the whole truth o story
    lo arregló a medios he didn't fix it properly
    2
    (entre dos): voy a comprar un número de lotería ¿vamos a medios? I'm going to buy a lottery ticket. Do you want to go halves?
    pagar a medios to pay half each, go halves
    lo hicimos a medios we did it between us
    D
    ( Chi fam) ( delante del n) (uso enfático): el medio auto que se gasta just look at the car he drives!
    half
    está medio borracha/loca she's half drunk/crazy
    lo dejaron allí medio muerto they left him there half dead
    fue medio violento encontrármelo ahí it was rather awkward meeting him there
    me lo dijo medio en broma medio en serio she said it half joking and half serious
    todo lo deja a medio hacer he never finishes anything, he leaves everything half finished
    medio como que se molestó cuando se lo dije (CS fam); she got kind of o sort of annoyed when I told her ( colloq)
    B
    1 (centro) middle
    en (el) medio de la habitación in the middle o center of the room
    el botón de en or del medio the middle button, the button in the middle
    el justo medio the happy medium
    quítate de en or del medio, que no me dejas ver get out of the way, I can't see
    quitar a algn de en medio ( euf); to get rid of sb ( euph), bump sb off ( colloq)
    2 los medios mpl ( Taur) center* ( of the ring)
    C
    1 (recurso, manera) means (pl)
    lo intentaron por todos los medios they tried everything they could
    no hay medio de localizarlo there's no way o means of locating him
    hizo lo que pudo con los medios a su alcance she did everything she could with the resources at her disposal
    como medio de coacción as a means of coercion
    medios económicos means (pl), resources (pl)
    no escatimó medios he spared no expense
    a pesar de los escasos medios de que dispone in spite of his limited means
    no cuenta con los medios necesarios para hacerlo she does not have the means o resources to do it
    Compuestos:
    la entrevista concedida a un medio de comunicación francés the interview given to a French newspaper ( o television station etc)
    los medios de comunicación sociales or de masas the mass media
    means of transport
    ( Méx) legal challenge
    mpl audiovisual aids (pl)
    mpl:
    los medio de producción the means of production
    D ( en locs):
    de por medio: no puedo dejarlo, están los niños de por medio I can't leave him, there are the children to think of
    hay muchos intereses creados de por medio there are a lot of vested interests involved
    en medio de: en medio de tanta gente (in) among so many people
    no sé cómo puedes trabajar en medio de este desorden I don't know how you can work in all this mess
    en medio de la confusión in o amid all the confusion
    en medio de todo all things considered
    en medio de todo más vale así all things considered, it's probably better this way
    por medio (CS, Per): día/semana por medio every other day/week
    dos o tres casas por medio every two or three houses
    por medio de: nos enteramos por medio de tu primo we found out from o through your cousin
    atrapa su presa por medio de estas pinzas it catches its prey by using these pincers
    se comunicaban por medio de este sistema they communicated by means of this system
    obtuvo el puesto por medio de estas influencias she got the job through these contacts
    de medio a medio: te equivocas de medio a medio you're completely wrong o utterly mistaken
    le acertó de medio a medio she was absolutely right
    E
    1
    (círculo, ámbito): en medios literarios/políticos in literary/political circles
    no está en su medio he's out of his element
    un artista prácticamente desconocido en nuestro medio (Col, CS); an artist who is practically unknown here o in our country ( o area etc)
    en medios bien informados se comenta que … informed opinion has it that …
    2 ( Biol) environment
    estos animales no sobreviven fuera de su medio natural these animals do not survive if removed from their natural habitat
    la adaptación al medio adaptation to one's environment o surroundings
    Compuesto:
    environment
    que no daña el medio ambiente eco-friendly, environmentally friendly
    F (dedo) middle finger
    G (moneda) five centavo or centésimo coin formerly used in some Latin American countries
    ni medio ( RPl fam): no se ve/no entendí ni medio you can't see/I didn't understand a thing
    el que nace para medio nunca llega a real if you don't have what it takes, you won't get on in the world
    * * *

     

    Del verbo mediar: ( conjugate mediar)

    medio es:

    1ª persona singular (yo) presente indicativo

    medió es:

    3ª persona singular (él/ella/usted) pretérito indicativo

    Multiple Entries:
    mediar    
    medio
    mediar ( conjugate mediar) verbo intransitivo

    medio EN algo ‹en conflicto/negociaciones› to mediate in sth, to act as mediator in sth
    b) ( interceder) medio POR algn to intercede for sb;

    medio ANTE algn to intercede o intervene with sb
    medio 1
    ◊ - dia adjetivo

    1 ( delante del n) ( la mitad de):

    media manzana half an apple;
    pagar medio pasaje to pay half fare o half price;
    media hora half an hour, a half hour (AmE);
    dos horas y media two and a half hours;
    a las cinco y media at half past five;
    a media mañana/tarde in the middle of the morning/afternoon;
    a medio camino halfway;
    media pensión ( en hoteles) half board;
    (se) dio medio vuelta y se fue she turned on her heel and left;
    un jugador de medio campo a midfield player;
    medio tiempo (AmL) half-time;
    mi media naranja (fam &
    hum) my better half (colloq & hum)
    2 (mediano, promedio) average;

    a medio y largo plazo in the medium and long term
    medio 2 adverbio
    half;

    todo lo deja a medio terminar he leaves everything half finished
    ■ sustantivo masculino
    1 (Mat) ( mitad) half
    2 ( centro) middle;
    ◊ en (el) medio de la habitación in the middle o center of the room;

    quitarse de en or del medio to get out of the way
    3
    a) (recurso, manera) means (pl);


    los medios de comunicación the media;
    medio de transporte means of transport
    b)

    ◊ medios sustantivo masculino plural ( recursos económicos) tb medios económicos means (pl), resources (pl)

    4 ( en locs)
    ◊ en medio de: en medio de tanta gente (in) among so many people;

    en medio de la confusión in o amid all the confusion;
    por medio (CS, Per): día/semana por medio every other day/week;
    dos casas por medio every two houses;
    por medio de (de proceso/técnica) by means of;
    por medio de tu primo from o through your cousin
    5
    a) (círculo, ámbito):

    ◊ en medios literarios/políticos in literary/political circles;

    no está en su medio he's out of his element
    b) (Biol) environment;


    medio ambiente environment;
    que no da daña el medio ambiente eco-friendly, environmentally friendly
    mediar verbo intransitivo
    1 (arbitrar, intervenir) to mediate: España mediará en el conflicto, Spain will mediate in the conflict
    2 (interceder) to intercede: mediará por ti, she'll intercede on your behalf
    3 (interponerse) media la circunstancia de que..., you must take into account that...
    4 (periodo de tiempo) to pass: mediaron un par de días, two days passed
    medio,-a
    I adjetivo
    1 (mitad) half: sólo queda medio melón, there is only half a melon left
    una hora y media, an hour and a half
    2 (no extremo) middle
    a media tarde, in the middle of the afternoon
    clase media, middle class
    punto medio, middle ground
    3 (prototípico) average: la calidad media es baja, the average quality is poor
    la mujer media, the average woman
    II adverbio half: el trabajo está medio hecho, the work is half done
    III sustantivo masculino
    1 (mitad) half
    2 (centro) middle
    en medio de la batalla, in the midst of the battle
    en medio de los árboles, among the trees
    (entre dos) in between the trees
    un barco en medio del desierto, a ship in the middle of the desert
    sal de ahí en medio, get out of the way
    3 (instrumento, vía) means: el fin no justifica los medios, the aim doesn't justify the means
    4 (entorno) enviroment
    un medio hostil, a hostile enviroment
    ' medio' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    achuchar
    - adivinarse
    - ambiente
    - calle
    - camino
    - coger
    - conducto
    - coralina
    - coralino
    - cuerpo
    - Ecuador
    - elemento
    - en
    - entorno
    - habitar
    - lado
    - locomoción
    - media
    - ocupante
    - odisea
    - oriente
    - perder
    - por
    - radical
    - recurso
    - sacar
    - tener
    - término
    - tierra
    - través
    - a
    - alzado
    - arma
    - atontado
    - caja
    - canal
    - derruido
    - destruir
    - día
    - efectivo
    - gusto
    - hombre
    - hostil
    - instrumento
    - ir
    - loco
    - Medio Oriente
    - mejor
    - menos
    - meter
    English:
    about
    - air
    - and
    - average
    - backdrop
    - between
    - bread
    - call away
    - canter
    - centre
    - cobble together
    - discern
    - East
    - end
    - environment
    - environmentalist
    - envoy
    - freight
    - half
    - half-dead
    - half-dressed
    - half-empty
    - half-full
    - half-open
    - half-serious
    - half-way
    - mean
    - means
    - medium
    - medium-term
    - mid
    - middle
    - Middle East
    - middleweight
    - midst
    - moderate
    - on
    - over
    - part
    - resource
    - Roman arch
    - rough up
    - sandwich course
    - scrum-half
    - semiliterate
    - shelf
    - slush
    - slushy
    - stimulate
    - television
    * * *
    medio, -a
    ♦ adj
    1. [igual a la mitad] half;
    media docena half a dozen;
    media hora half an hour;
    medio litro half a litre;
    el estadio registra media entrada the stadium is half full;
    medio pueblo estaba allí half the town was there;
    medio Quito se quedó sin electricidad half of Quito was left without electricity;
    la bandera ondeaba a media asta the flag was flying at half mast;
    a medio camino [en viaje] halfway there;
    [en trabajo] halfway through;
    a media luz in the half-light;
    nos salimos a media película we left halfway through the movie o Br film;
    como algo a media mañana I have something to eat halfway through the morning, I have a mid-morning snack;
    docena y media one and a half dozen;
    un kilo y medio one and a half kilos;
    son las dos y media it's half past two;
    son y media it's half past
    Andes, Méx, Ven medio fondo waist petticoat o slip;
    la media luna the crescent;
    la Media Luna Roja the Red Crescent;
    Fam Fig media naranja:
    mi/su/ etc[m5]. media naranja my/your/ etc other o better half;
    media pensión half board;
    CSur medio pupilo [que va a dormir a casa] day pupil; [que va a casa el fin de semana] boarder;
    media suela half-sole;
    media volea half volley
    2. [intermedio] [estatura, tamaño] medium;
    [posición, punto] middle;
    de una calidad media of average quality;
    a medio plazo in the medium term;
    de clase media middle-class;
    a media distancia in the middle distance
    medio campo midfield; Am medio tiempo half-time
    3. [de promedio] [temperatura, velocidad] average;
    Mat mean;
    el consumo medio de agua por habitante the average water consumption per head of the population;
    a una velocidad media de 50 km/h at an average speed of 50 km/h
    4. [corriente] ordinary, average;
    el ciudadano medio the average person, ordinary people
    ♦ adv
    half;
    medio borracho half drunk;
    estaba medio muerto he was half dead;
    a medio hacer half done;
    han dejado la obra a medio hacer they've left the building half finished;
    aún estoy a medio arreglar I'm only half ready;
    pasé la noche medio en vela I barely slept all night, I spent half the night awake
    ♦ nm
    1. [mitad] half;
    uno y medio one and a half
    2. [centro] middle, centre;
    íbamos por el carril del medio o [m5] de en medio we were driving in the middle lane;
    en medio (de) in the middle (of);
    estaba incómoda en medio de toda aquella gente I felt uncomfortable among all those people;
    está en medio de una profunda depresión she's in the middle of a deep depression;
    no se oía nada en medio de tanto ruido you couldn't hear a thing with all that noise;
    han puesto una valla en medio they've put a fence in the way;
    si te pones en medio no veo la tele I can't see the TV if you're in the way;
    quítate de en medio get out of the way;
    siempre tienes todas tus cosas por medio your things are always lying around all over the place;
    estar por (en) medio [estorbar] to be in the way;
    hay muchos intereses de por medio there are a lot of interests involved;
    meterse o [m5] ponerse (de) por medio [estorbar] to get in the way;
    Fig [entrometerse] to interfere;
    equivocarse de medio a medio to be completely wrong;
    Fam
    quitar de en medio a alguien to get rid of sb;
    quitarse de en medio [suicidarse] to do away with oneself
    3. [sistema, manera] means [singular or plural], method;
    utilice cualquier medio a su alcance use whatever means are available, use every means available;
    encontró un medio para pagar menos impuestos she found a way of paying less tax;
    no hay medio de convencerla she refuses to be convinced;
    por medio de by means of, through;
    ha encontrado trabajo por medio de un conocido she got a job through an acquaintance;
    por todos los medios by all possible means;
    intentaré conseguir ese trabajo por todos los medios I'll do whatever it takes to get that job;
    su medio de vida es la chatarra he earns his living from scrap metal
    los medios de comunicación the media;
    medios de producción means of production;
    medio de transporte means of transport o US transportation
    4.
    medios [recursos] means, resources;
    no cuenta con los medios económicos para realizarlo she lacks the means o the (financial) resources to do it
    5. [elemento físico] environment;
    animales que viven en el medio acuático animals that live in an aquatic environment
    medio ambiente environment; Biol medio de cultivo culture medium;
    medio físico physical environment
    6. [ámbito]
    el medio rural/urbano the countryside/city;
    en medios financieros/políticos in financial/political circles;
    en medios bien informados in well-informed circles
    7. Dep [en fútbol, hockey] midfielder;
    [en rugby] halfback medio (de) apertura [en rugby] fly half, stand-off;
    medio (de) melé [en rugby] scrum half
    8. Taurom
    los medios = centre of bullring
    9. Comp
    CSur Fam
    ni medio: no oye ni medio he's as deaf as a post;
    no entiende ni medio she hasn't got a clue;
    por medio: nado día por medio I swim every other day
    * * *
    I adj
    1 half;
    las tres y media half past three, three-thirty;
    2 tamaño medium
    3 (de promedio) average
    4 posición middle
    II m
    1 ( entorno) environment
    2 en fútbol midfielder
    3 ( centro) middle;
    en medio de in the middle of
    4 ( manera) means;
    por medio de by means of;
    medios pl dinero means, resources
    III adv half;
    hacer algo a medias half do sth;
    ir a medias go halves;
    a medio hacer half done;
    de medio a medio completely;
    día por medio L.Am. every other day;
    quitar de en medio algo fam move sth out of the way;
    quitarse de en medio get out of the way
    * * *
    medio adv
    1) : half
    está medio dormida: she's half asleep
    2) : rather, kind of
    está medio aburrida esta fiesta: this party is rather boring
    medio, - dia adj
    1) : half
    una media hora: half an hour
    medio hermano: half brother
    a media luz: in the half-light
    son las tres y media: it's half past three, it's three-thirty
    2) : midway, halfway
    a medio camino: halfway there
    3) : middle
    la clase media: the middle class
    4) : average
    la temperatura media: the average temperature
    medio nm
    1) centro: middle, center
    en medio de: in the middle of, amid
    2) ambiente: milieu, environment
    3) : medium, spiritualist
    4) : means pl, way
    por medio de: by means of
    los medios de comunicación: the media
    5) medios nmpl
    : means, resources
    * * *
    medio1 adj
    1. (mitad) half
    2. (promedio, normal) average
    medio2 adv half
    medio3 n
    1. (centro) middle
    2. (entorno) environment
    3. (recurso, método) means

    Spanish-English dictionary > medio

  • 69 एलुकम् _ēlukam

    एलुकम् 1 A kind of perfume.
    -2 A medicinal substance or plant.
    *****1.
    एव a. Ved.
    1 Going, moving.
    -2 Speedy, quick; एवो गन्ता; ये च एवा मरुतः Uṇ.1.15.
    -वः 1 A course, way; or a courser, a fleet horse; स्वेभिरेवैश्चरतः Rv.1.62.8; (pl.) mode of proceeding, custom, habit; or according to Sāyaṇa a desire or hymn.
    -Comp. -या a. granting protection; or going in ways or courses.
    -यावन् a. going with horses or granting desires, going quickly. -m. N. of Viṣṇu.
    *****2.
    एव ind. This particle is most frequently used to strengthen and emphasize the idea expressed by a word:-- (1) Just, quite, exactly; एवमेव quite so, just so; (2) same, very, identical; अर्थोष्मणा विरहितः पुरुषः स एव Bh.2.4 that very man; (3) only, alone, merely, (implying exclusion); सा तथ्यमेवाभिहिता भवेन Ku.3.63 only the truth, nothing but the truth; so नाम्नैव, स एव वीरः he alone (and not others); (4) already; गत एव न ते निवर्तते Ku.4.3; (5) scarcely, the moment, as soon as; chiefly with participles; उपस्थि- तेयं कल्याणी नाम्नि कीर्तित एव यत् R.1.87 as soon as the name was uttered; इति चिन्तयन्नेव while just thinking &c; (6) also, likewise; तथैव so also; (7) like, as (showing similarity); श्रीस्त एव मेस्तु G. M. (= तव इव); and (8) generally to emphasize a statement; भवितव्यमेव तेन U.4 it will (surely) take place. It is also said to imply the senses of (9) detraction; (1) diminution (11) command; (12) restraint; or (13) used merely as an expletive. (This particle is used in the Vedas in the senses of so, just so, like, indeed, truly, really) (14) Again; एवशब्दश्च पुनरित्यस्मिन्नर्थे भविष्यति । यथा क्षीरेण भुक्त्त्वा देवदत्तः क्षीरेणैव भुञ्जीतेति । भुञ्जीतैवेति पुनरिति गम्यते । ŚB. on MS.1.8.36.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > एलुकम् _ēlukam

  • 70 त्रि _tri

    त्रि num. a. [Uṇ.5.66] (declined in pl. only, nom. त्रयः m., तिस्त्रः f., त्रीणि n.) Three; त एव हि त्रयो लोकास्त एव त्रय आश्रमाः &c. Ms.2.229; प्रियतमाभिरसौ तिसृभिर्बभौ R.9.18; त्रीणि वर्षाण्युदीक्षेत कुमार्यृतुमती सती Ms.9.9 [cf. L. tres; Gr. treis; A. S., Zend thri; Eng. three].
    -Comp. -अंशः 1 a three-fold share; त्र्यंशं दायाद्धरेद्विप्रः Ms.9.151.
    -2 a third part.
    -3 three-fourths.
    -अक्ष a. triocular.
    -अक्षः, -अक्षकः an epithet of Śiva; शुष्कस्नायु- स्वराह्लादात्त्र्यक्षं जग्राह रावणः Pt.5.57.
    -अक्षरः 1 the mystic syllable ओम् consisting of three letters; see under अ. आद्यं यत्त्र्यक्षरं ब्रह्म Ms.11.265.
    -2 a match- maker or घटक (that word consisting of three syllables).
    -3 a genealogist. (
    -री) knowledge, learning; see विद्या.
    -अङ्कटम्, -अङ्गटम् 1 three strings suspended to either end of a pole for carrying burdens.
    -2 a sort of colly- rium. (
    -टः) N. of Śiva.
    -अङ्गम् (pl.) a tripartite army (chariots, cavalry and infantry).
    -अङ्गुलम् three fingers' breadth.
    -अञ्जनम् the three kinds of collyrium; i. e. कालाञ्जन, रसाञ्जन and पुष्पाञ्जन.
    -अञ्जलम्, -लिः three handfuls taken collectively.
    -अधिपतिः (the lord of the 3 guṇas or worlds), an epithet of Viṣṇu; Bhāg.3.16.24.
    -अधिष्ठानः the soul. (
    नम्) spirit, life (चैतन्य). -a. having three stations; Ms.12.4.
    -अध्वगा, -मार्गगा, -वर्त्मगा epithets of the river Ganges (flowing through the three worlds).
    -अनीक a. having the three properties of heat, rain and cold; त्यनीकः पत्यते माहिनावान् Rv.3.56.3. (
    -का) an army consisting of horses, elephants and chariots.
    -अब्द a. three years old.
    -ब्दम् three years taken collectively.
    -अम्बकः (also त्रियम्बक in the same sense though rarely used in classical literature) 'having three eyes', N. of Śiva.; त्रियम्बकं संयमिनं ददर्श Ku.3.44; जडीकृतस्त्र्यम्बकवीक्षणेन R.2. 42;3.49. ˚सखः an epithet of Kubera; कुबेरस्त्र्यम्बकसखः Ak.
    -अम्बका an epithet of Pārvatī
    -अशीत a. eighty-third.
    -अशीतिः f. eighty-three.
    -अष्टन् a. twenty-four.
    -अश्र, -अस्र a. triangular. (
    -स्रम्) a triangle.
    -अहः 1 a period of three days.
    -2 a festival lasting three days.
    -आर्षेयाः deaf, dumb and blind persons.
    -आहिक a.
    1 performed or produced in three days.
    -2 recurring after the third day, tertian (as fever).
    -3 having provision for three days कुशूलकुम्भीधान्यो वा त्र्याहिको$श्वस्तनो$पि वा Y.1.128.
    -ऋचम् (
    तृचम् also) three Riks taken collectively; Ms.8.16.
    -ऐहिक a. having provision for three days.
    -ककुद् m.
    1 N. of the moun- tain Trikūṭa.
    -2 N. of Viṣnu or Kṛiṣṇa.
    -3 the highest, chief.
    -4 a sacrifice lasting for ten nights.
    -ककुभ् m. Ved.
    1 Indra.
    -2 Indra's thunderbolt.
    -कटु dry ginger, black pepper and long pepper taken together as a drug; शिरामोक्षं विधायास्य दद्यात् त्रिकटुकं गुडम् Śālihotra 62.
    -कण्टः, -कण्टकः a kind of fish.
    -करणी the side of a square 3 times as great as another.
    -कर्मन् n. the chief three duties of a Brāhmaṇa i. e. sacrifice, study of the Vedas, and making gifts or charity. (-m.) one who engages in these three duties (as a Brāhmaṇa).
    -काण्डम् N. of Amarsiṁha's dictionary.
    -कायः N. of Buddha.
    -कालम् 1 the three times; the past, the pre- sent, and the future; or morning, noon and evening.
    -2 the three tenses (the past, present, and future) of a verb. (
    -लम् ind. three times, thrice; ˚ज्ञ, ˚दर्शिन् a. omniscient (m.)
    1 a divine sage, seer.
    -2 a deity.
    -3 N. of Buddha. ˚विद् m.
    1 a Buddha.
    -2 an Arhat (with the Jainas).
    -कूटः N. of a mountain in Ceylon on the top of which was situated Laṅkā, the capital of Rāvaṇa.; Śi.2.5.
    -कूटम् sea-salt.
    कूर्चकम् a knife with three edges.
    -कोण a. triangular, forming a triangle.
    (-णः) 1 a triangle.
    -2 the vulva.
    -खम् 1 tin.
    -2 a cucumber.
    -खट्वम्, -खट्वी three bed- steads taken collectively.
    -क्षाराणि n. (pl.) salt-petre, natron and borax.
    -गणः an aggregate of the three objects of worldly existence; i. e. धर्म, अर्थ and काम; न बाधते$स्य त्रिगणः परस्परम् Ki.1.11; see त्रिवर्ग below.
    -गत a.
    1 tripled.
    -2 done in three days.
    -गर्ताः (pl.)
    1 N. of a country, also called जलन्धर, in the north- west of India.
    -2 the people or rulers of that country.
    -3 a particular mode of calculation.
    -गर्ता 1 a lascivious woman, wanton.
    -2 a woman in general.
    -3 a pearl.
    -4 a kind of cricket.
    -गुण a.
    1 consisting of three threads; व्रताय मौञ्जीं त्रिगुणां बभार याम् Ku.5.1.
    -2 three-times repeated, thrice, treble, threefold, triple; सप्त व्यतीयुस्त्रिगुणानि तस्य (दिनानि) R.2. 25.
    -3 containing the three Guṇas सत्त्व, रजस् and तमस्. (
    -णम्) the Pradhāna (in Sāṅ. phil.); (-ind.) three times; in three ways.
    -णाः m. (pl.) the three quali- ties or constituents of nature; त्रयीमयाय त्रिगुणात्मने नमः K.1.
    (-णा) 1 Māyā or illusion (in Vedānta phil.).
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -गुणाकृतम् ploughed thrice.
    -चक्षुस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -चतुर a. (pl.) three or four; गत्वा जवात्त्रिचतुराणि पदानि सीता B.R.6.34.
    -चत्वा- रिंश a. forty-third.
    -चत्वारिंशत् f, forty-three.
    -जगत् n.
    -जगती the three worlds, (1) the heaven, the atmos- phere and the earth; or (2) the heaven, the earth, and the lower world; त्वत्कीर्तिः...... त्रिजगति विहरत्येवमुर्वीश गुर्वी Sūkti.5.59.
    -जटः an epithet of Śiva.
    -जटा N. of a female demon, one of the Rākṣasa attendants kept by Rāvaṇa to watch over Sītā, when she was retained as a captive in the Aśoka-vanikā. She acted very kindly towards Sītā and induced her companions to do the same; सीतां मायेति शंसन्ति त्रिजटा समजीवयत् R.12.74.
    -जातम्, जातकम् The three spices (mace, cardamoms, cinnamon).
    -जीवा, -ज्या the sine of three signs or 9˚, a radius.
    -णता a bow; कामुकानिव नालीकांस्त्रिणताः सहसामुचन् Śi.19.61.
    -णव, -णवन् a. (pl.) three times nine; i. e. 27.
    -णाकः the heaven; तावत्त्रिणाकं नहुषः शशास Bhāg.6.13.16.
    -णाचिकेतः 1 a part of the Adhvaryu-sacrifice or Yajur- veda, or one who performs a vow connected therewith (according to Kull. on Ms.3.185); Mb.13.9.26.
    -2 one who has thrice kindled the Nāchiketa fire or studied the Nāchiketa section of Kāṭhaka; त्रिणाचिकेत- स्त्रिभिरेत्य सन्धिम् Kaṭh.1.17.
    -णीता a wife ('thrice married'; it being supposed that a girl belongs to Soma, Gandharva and Agni before she obtains a human husband).
    -णेमि a. with three fellies; विचिन्वतो$भूत् सुमहांस्त्रिणेमिः Bhāg.3.8.2.
    -तक्षम्, तक्षी three carpen- ters taken collectively.
    -दण्डम् 1 the three staves of a Saṁnyāsin (who has resigned the world) tied togethar so as to form one.
    -2 the triple subjection of thought, word, and deed. (
    -ण्डः) the state of a religious ascetic; ज्ञानवैराग्यरहितस्त्रिदण्डमुपजीवति Bhāg.11.18.4.
    -दण्डिन् m.
    1 a religious mendicant or Saṁnyāsin who has renounced all worldly attachments, and who carries three long staves tied together so as to form one in his right hand; तल्लिप्सुः स यतिर्भूत्वा त्रिदण्डी द्वारका- मगात् Bhāg.1.86.3.
    -2 one who has obtained command over his mind, speech, and body (or thought, word, and deed); cf. वाग्दण्डो$थ मनोदण्डः कायदण्डस्तथैव च । यस्यैते निहिता बुद्धौ त्रिदण्डीति स उच्यते ॥ Ms.12.1.
    -दशाः (pl.)
    1 thirty.
    -2 the thirty-three gods:-- 12 Ādityas, 8 Vasus, 11 Rudras and 2 Aśvins. (
    -शः) a god, an immortal; तस्मिन्मघोनस्त्रिदशान्विहाय सहस्रमक्ष्णां युगपत्पपात Ku.3.1. ˚अङ्कुशः (-शम्) the heaven. ˚आयुधम् Indra's thunder- bolt; R.9.54. ˚आयुधम् rainbow; अथ नभस्य इव त्रिदशायुधम् R.9.54. ˚अधिपः, ˚ईश्वरः, ˚पतिः epithets of Indra. ˚अधिपतिः N. of Śiva. ˚अध्यक्षः, ˚अयनः an epithet of Viṣṇu. ˚अरिः a demon. ˚आचार्यः an epithet of Bṛihas- pati. ˚आधार Nectar. ˚आलयः, ˚आवासः
    1 heaven.
    -2 the mountain Meru.
    -3 a god. ˚आहारः 'the food of the gods', nectar. ˚इन्द्रः
    1 Indra.
    -2 Śiva.
    -3 Brahman. ˚गुरुः an epithet of Bṛihaspati, ˚गोपः a kind of insect; (cf. इन्द्रगोप) श्रद्दधे त्रिदशगोपमात्रके दाहशक्तिमिव कृष्णवर्त्मनि R.11.42. ˚दीर्घिका an epithet of the Ganges. ˚पतिः Indra; एषो$प्यैरावतस्थस्त्रिदशपतिः Ratn.4.11. ˚पुङ्गवः Viṣṇu; Rām.1. ˚मञ्जरी the holy basil. ˚वधू, ˚वनिता, an Apsaras or heavenly damsel; कैलासस्य त्रिदशवनितादर्पणस्यातिथिः स्याः Me.6. ˚वर्त्मन् the sky. ˚श्रेष्ठः
    1 Agni.
    -2 Brahman. ˚दशीभूत Become divine; त्रिदशीभूतपौराणां स्वर्गान्तरमकल्पयत् R.15.12.
    -दिनम् three days collectively. ˚स्पृश् m. concurrence of three lunations with one solar day.
    -दिवम् 1 the heaven; त्रिमार्गयेव त्रिदिवस्य मार्गः Ku.1.28; Ś.7.3.
    -2 sky, atmosphere.
    -3 paradise.
    -4 happi- ness. (
    -वा) cardamoms. ˚अधीशः, ˚ईशः
    1 an epithet of Indra.
    -2 a god. ˚आलयः the heaven; अश्वमेधजिताँल्लोका- नाप्नोति त्रिदिवालये Mb.13.141.53. ˚उद्भवा
    1 the Ganges.
    -2 small cardamoms. ˚ओकस् m. a god; वपुषि त्रिदिवौकसां परं सह पुष्पैरपतत्र्छिलीमुखाः Vikr.15.72. ˚गत dead; त्रिदिवगतः किमु वक्ष्यते पिता मे Vikr.6.62.
    -दृश् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -दोषम् vitiation or derangement of the three humours of the body, i. e. वात, पित्त and कफ.
    -धा ind. in 3 parts, ways or places; triply, ˚त्वम् tripartition; Ch. Up.
    -धातुः an epithet of Gaṇeśa;
    -तुम् 1 the triple world.
    -2 the aggregate of the 3 minerals or humours.
    -धामन् m.
    1 N. of Viṣṇu.
    -2 of Vyāsa;
    -3 of Śiva.
    -4 of Agni.
    -5 death. -n. the heaven; हंसो हंसेन यानेन त्रिधाम परमं ययौ Bhāg.3.24.2.
    -धारा the Ganges.
    -नयन, -नेत्रः, -लोचनः epithets of Śiva; R.3. 66; Ku.3.66;5.72.
    - नवत a. ninety-third.
    -नवतिः f. ninety three.
    -नयना Pārvat&imacr.
    -नाभः Viṣṇu; Bhāg.8. 17.26.
    -नेत्रचूडामणिः the moon.
    -नेत्रफलः the cocoa-nut tree.
    -पञ्च a. three-fold five, i. e. fifteen.
    -पञ्चाश a. fiftythird.
    -पञ्चाशत् f. fifty-three.
    -पुटः glass (काच).
    -पताकः 1 the hand with three fingers stretched out or erect.
    -2 the forehead marked naturally with three horizontal lines.
    -पत्रकः the Palāśa tree.
    -पथम् 1 the three paths taken collectively, i. e. the sky, atmosphere, and the earth, or the sky, earth and the lower world.
    -2 a place where three roads meet. (
    -था) an epithet of Mathura. ˚गा, ˚गामिनी an epithet of the Ganges; गङ्गा त्रिपथगामिनी; धृतसत्पथस्त्रिपथगामभितः स तमारुरोह पुरुहूतसुतः Ki.6.1; Amaru.99.
    -पद्, -पाद्, -पात् m. Ved.
    1 Viṣṇu.
    -2 fever (personified).
    -पद a. three-footed. (
    -दम्) a tripod; त्रिपदैः करकैः स्थालैः...... Śiva. B.22. 62.
    -पदिका 1 a tripod.
    -2 a stand with three feet.
    -पदी 1 the girth of an elephant; नास्रसत्करिणां ग्रैवं त्रिपदी- च्छेदिनामपि R.4.48.
    -2 the Gāyatrī metre.
    -3 a tripod.
    -4 the plant गोधापदी.
    -परिक्रान्त a. one who walks thrice round a sacred fire.
    -पर्णः Kiṁśuka tree.
    -पाटः 1 intersection of a prolonged side and perpendicular (in a quadrangular figure).
    -2 the figure formed by such intersection.
    -पाटिका a beak.
    पाठिन् a.
    1 familiar with Saṁhitā, Pada, and Krama.
    -2 one who learns a thing after three repetitions.
    -पादः 1 the Supreme Being.
    -2 fever.
    -पाद् a.
    1 having three feet.
    -2 con- sisting of three parts, having three fourths; राघवः शिथिलं तस्थौ भुवि धर्मस्त्रिपादिव R.15.96.
    -3 trinomial. (-m.)
    1 an epithet of Viṣṇu in his dwarf incarnation.
    -2 the Supreme Being.
    -पिटकम् the 3 collections of Buddhistic sacred writings (सुत्त, विनय and अभिधम्म).
    -पुट a. triangular.
    (-टः) 1 an arrow.
    -2 the palm of the hand.
    -3 a cubit.
    -4 a bank or shore.
    -पुटकः a triangle.
    -पुटा an epithet of Durgā.
    -पुटिन् m. the castor-oil plant.
    -पुण्ड्रम्, -पुण्ड्रक a mark on the forehead consisting of three lines made with cowdung ashes.
    -पुरम् 1 a collection of three cities.
    -2 the three cities of gold, silver, and iron in the sky, air and earth built for demons by Maya; (these cities were burnt down, along the demons inhabiting them, by Śiva at the request of the gods); Ku.7.48; Amaru.2; संरक्ताभिस्त्रिपुरविजयो गीयते किन्नरीभिः Me.56; Bh.3.123; (
    -रः) N. of a demon or demons presiding over these cities. ˚अधिपतिः N. of Maya, ˚अन्तकः, ˚अरिः, ˚घ्नः, ˚दहनः, ˚द्विष् m., हरः &c. epithets of Śiva; अये गौरीनाथ त्रिपुरहर शम्भो त्रिनयन Bh.3.123; R.17.14. ˚दाहः burning of the three cities; मुहुरनुस्मरयन्तमनुक्षपं त्रिपुरदाहमुमापतिसेविनः Ki.5.14. ˚सुन्दरी Durgā.
    (-री) 1 N. of a place near Jabalpura, formerly capital of the kings of Chedi.
    -2 N. of a country.
    -पुरुष a
    1 having the length of three men.
    -2 having three assistants. (
    -षम्) the three ancestors- father, grand-father and great-grand-father.
    -पृष्ठम् the highest heaven; Bhāg.1.19.23. (
    ष्ठः) Viṣṇu.
    -पौरुष a.
    1 belonging to, or extending over, three generations of men.
    2 offered to three (as oblations).
    -3 inherited from three (as an estate).
    -प्रस्रुतः an elephant in rut.
    -फला (1) the three myrobalans taken collectively, namely, Terminalia Chebula, T. Bellerica, and Phyllanthus (Mar. हिरडा, बेहडा and आंवळकाठी). Also (2) the three sweet fruits (grape, pomegranate, and date); (3) the three fragrant fruits (nutmeg, areca- nut, and cloves).
    -बन्धनः the individual soul.
    -बलिः, बली, -वलिः, -वली f.
    1 the three folds or wrinkles of skin above the navel of a woman (regarded as a mark of beauty); क्षामोदरोपरिलसत्त्रिवलीलतानाम् Bh.1.93,81; cf. Ku.1.39.
    -2 the anus.
    -बलीकम् the anus.
    -बाहुः a kind of fighting with swords.
    -ब्रह्मन् a. with ब्रह्मा, विष्णु and महेश.
    -भम् three signs of the zodiac, or ninety degrees.
    -भङ्गम् a pose in which the image is bent at three parts of the body.
    -भद्रम् copulation, sexual union, cohabitation.
    -भागः 1 the third part; त्रिभागं ब्रह्महत्यायाः कन्या प्राप्नोति दुष्यती Mb.12.165.42.
    -2 the third part of a sign of the zodiac.
    -भुक्ल a. one possessed of learning, good conduct and good family-descent (Dānasāgara, Bibliotheca Indica,274, Fasc.1, p.29).
    -भुजम् a triangle.
    -भुवनम् the three worlds; पुण्यं यायास्त्रिभुवन- गुरोर्धाम चण्डीश्वरस्य Me.35; Bh.1.99. ˚गुरु Śiva. ˚कीर्तिरसः a patent medicine in Āyurveda. ˚पतिः Viṣṇu.
    -भूमः a palace with three floors.
    -मद the three narcotic plants; the three-fold haughtiness; Bhāg.3.1.43.
    -मधु n.
    -मधुरम् 1 sugar, honey, and ghee.
    -2 three verses of the Ṛigveda (1.9.6-8; मधु वाता ऋतायते˚).
    -3 a ceremony based on the same; L. D. B.
    -4 threefold utterance of a vedic stanza ˚मधु वाता -m. a reciter and performer of the above ceremony; L. D. B.
    -मार्गा the Ganges; त्रिमार्गयेव त्रिदिवस्य मार्गः Ku.1.28.
    -मुकुटः the Trikūṭa mountain.
    -मुखः an epithet of Buddha.
    -मुनि ind. having the three sages पाणिनि, कात्यायन and पतञ्जलि; त्रिमुनि व्याकरणम्.
    -मूर्तिः 1 the united form of Brahmā, Viṣṇu, and Maheśa, the Hindu triad; नमस्त्रिमूर्तये तुभ्यं प्रांक्सृष्टेः केवलात्मने । गुणत्रयविभायाय पश्चाद्भेदमुपेयुषे ॥ Ku.2.4.
    -2 Buddha, or Jina.
    -मूर्धन् m.
    1 a demon; त्रयश्च दूषण- खरस्त्रिमूर्धानो रणे हताः U.2.15.
    -2 a world called महर्लोक; G&imac;rvāṇa; cf. अमृतं क्षेममभयं त्रिमूर्ध्नो$धायि मूर्धसु Bhāg.2.6.19.
    -यव a. weighing 3 barley corns; Ms.8.134.
    -यष्टिः a necklace of three strings.
    -यामकम् sin.
    -यामा 1 night (consisting of 3 watches of praharas, the first and last half prahara being excluded); संक्षिप्येत क्षण इव कथं दीर्घयामा त्रियामा Me.11, Ku.7.21,26; R.9.7; V.3. 22.
    -2 turmeric.
    -3 the Indigo plant.
    -4 the river Yamuṇā.
    -युगः an epithet of Viṣṇu; धर्मं महापुरुष पासि युगानुवृत्तं छन्नः कलौ यदभवस्त्रियुगो$थ सत्त्वम् Bhāg.7.9.38; the god in the form of यज्ञपुरुष; Bhāg.5.18.35.
    -योनिः a law-suit (in which a person engages from anger, cove- tousness, or infatuation).
    -रसकम् spirituous liquor; see त्रिसरकम्.
    -रात्र a. lasting for three nights. (
    -त्रः) a festival lasting for three nights. (
    -त्रम्) a period of three nights.
    -रेखः a conch-shell.
    -लिङ्ग a. having three genders, i. e. an adjective.
    -2 possessing the three Guṇas. (
    -गाः) the country called Telaṅga. (
    -गी) the three genders taken collectively.
    -लोकम् the three worlds. (
    -कः) an inhabitant of the three worlds; यद्धर्मसूनोर्बत राजसूये निरीक्ष्य दृक्स्वस्त्ययनं त्रिलोकः Bhāg.3. 2.13. ˚आत्मन् m. the Supreme Being. ˚ईशः the sun. ˚नाथः 'lord of the three worlds', an epithet of
    1 Indra; त्रिलोकनाथेन सदा मखद्विषस्त्वया नियम्या ननु दिव्यचक्षुषा R.3.45.
    -2 of Śiva; Ku.5.77. ˚रक्षिन् a. protecting the 3 worlds; त्रिलोकरक्षी महिमा हि वज्रिणः V.1.6.
    -लोकी the three worlds taken collectively, the universe; सत्यामेव त्रिलोकीसरिति हरशिरश्चुम्बिनीविच्छटायाम् Bh.3.95; Śānti.4.22.
    -लोचनः Śiva.
    (-ना) 1 an unchaste woman.
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -लोहकम् the three metals:-- gold, silver, and copper.
    -वर्गः 1 the three objects of wordly existence, i. e. धर्म, अर्थ, and काम; अनेन धर्मः सविशेषमद्य मे त्रिवर्गसारः प्रतिभाति भाविनि Ku.5.38; अन्योन्यानुबन्धम् (त्रिवर्गम्) Kau. A.1.7; प्राप त्रिवर्गं बुबुधे$त्रिवर्गम् (मोक्षम्) Bu. Ch.2.41.
    -2 the three states of loss, stability, and increase; क्षयः स्थानं च वृद्धिश्च त्रिवर्गो नीतिवेदिनाम् Ak.
    -3 the three qualities of nature, i. e. सत्त्व, रजस्, and तमस्.
    -4 the three higher castes.
    -5 the three myrobalans.
    -6 propriety, decorum.
    -वर्णकम् the first three of the four castes of Hindus taken collectively.
    -वर्ष a. three years old; Ms.5.7.
    -वलिः, -ली f. (in comp.) three folds over a woman's navel (regarded as a mark of beauty)
    -वली the anus.
    -वारम् ind. three times, thrice.
    -विक्रमः Viṣṇu in his fifth or dwarf incarnation. ˚रसः a patent medicine in Āyurveda.
    -विद्यः a Brāhmaṇa versed in the three Vedas.
    -विध a. of three kinds, three-fold.
    -विष्टपम्, -पिष्टपम् 1 the world of Indra, heaven; त्रिविष्टपस्येव पतिं जयन्तः R.6.78.
    -2 the three worlds. ˚सद् m. a god.
    -वृत् a.
    1 threefold; मौञ्जी त्रिवृत्समा श्लक्ष्णा कार्या विप्रस्य मेखला Ms.2.42.
    -2 consisting of three parts (as three गुणs, विद्याs); Bhāg.3.24.33;1.23.39; (consisting of three letters- ओङ्कार); हिरण्यगर्भो वेदानां मन्त्राणां प्रणवस्त्रिवृत् Bhāg.11.16.12. (-m.)
    1 a sacrifice.
    -2 a girdle of three strings; Mb.12.47.44.
    -3 an amulet of three strings. (-f.) a plant possessing valuable purgative properties. ˚करण combining three things, i. e. earth, water, and fire.
    -वृत्तिः livelihood through 3 things (sacrifice, study and alms).
    -वेणिः, -णी f. the place near Prayāga where the Ganges joins the Yamunā and receives under ground the Sarasvatī; the place called दक्षिणप्रयाग where the three sacred rivers separate.
    -वेणुः 1 The staff (त्रिदण्ड) of a Saṁnyāsin; केचित् त्रिवेणुं जगृहुरेके पात्रं कमण्डलुम् Bhāg.11.23.34.
    -2 The pole of a chariot; अथ त्रिवेणुसंपन्नं...... बभञ्ज च महारथम् Rām.3. 51.16; Mb.7.156.83; a three bannered (chariot); Bhāg.4.26.1.
    -वेदः a Brāhmaṇa versed in the three Vedas.
    -शक्तिः a deity (त्रिकला), Māyā; Bhāg.2.6.31.
    -शङ्कुः 1 N. of a celebrated king of the Solar race, king of Ayodhyā and father of Hariśchandra. [He was a wise, pious, and just king, but his chief fault was that he loved his person to an inordinate degree. Desiring to celebrate a sacrifice by virtue of which he could go up to heaven in his mortal body, he requested his family-priest Vasiṣṭha to officiate for him; but being refused he next requested his hundred sons who also rejected his absurd proposal. He, therefore, called them cowardly and impotent, and was, in return for these insults, cursed and degraded by them to be a Chāṇḍāla. While he was in this wretched condition, Viśvāmitra, whose family Triśaṅku had in times of famine laid under deep obligations, undertook to celebrate the sacrifice, and invited all the gods to be present. They, however, declined; whereupon the enraged Viśvāmitra. by his own power lifted up Triśaṅku to the skies with his cherished mortal body. He began to soar higher and higher till his head struck against the vault of the heaven, when he was hurled down head-foremost by Indra and the other gods. The mighty Viśvāmitra, however, arrested him in his downward course, saying 'Stay Triśaṅku', and the unfortunate monarch remained suspended with his head towards the earth as a constellation in the southern hemisphere. Hence the wellknown proverb:-- त्रिशङ्कुरिवान्तरा तिष्ठ Ś.2.]
    -2 the Chātaka bird.
    -3 a cat.
    -4 a grass-hopper.
    -5 a fire- fly. ˚जः an epithet of Hariśchandra. ˚याजिन् m. an epithet of Viśvāmitra.
    -शत a. three hundred.
    (-तम्) 1 one hundred and three.
    -2 three hundred.
    -शरणः a Buddha.
    -शर्करा three kinds of sugar (गुडोत्पन्ना, हिमोत्था, and मधुरा).
    -शाख a. three-wrinkled; भ्रुकुट्या भीषणमुखः प्रकृत्यैव त्रिशाखया Ks.12.72.
    -शालम् a house with three halls or chambers.
    -शिखम् 1 a trident; तदापतद्वै त्रिशिखं गरुत्मते Bhāg.1.59.9.
    -2 a crown or crest (with three points).
    -शिरस् m.
    1 N. of a demon killed by Rāma.
    -2 an epithet of Kubera.
    -3 fever. त्रिशिरस्ते प्रसन्नो$स्मि व्येतु ते मज्ज्वराद्भयम् Bhāg.1.63.29.
    -शीर्षः Śiva.
    -शीर्षकम्, -शूलम् a trident. ˚अङ्कः, ˚धारिन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -शुक्लम् the holy combination of 'three days' viz. Uttarāyaṇa (day of the gods), the bright half of the moon (day of the manes) and day- time; त्रिशुक्ले मरणं यस्य, L. D. B.
    -शूलिन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -शृङ्गः 1 the Trikūṭa mountain.
    -2 a triangle.
    -शोकः the soul.
    -षष्टिः f. sixty-three.
    -ष्टुभ् f. a metre of 4 x 11 syllables.
    -संध्यम्, -संध्यी the three periods of the day, i. e. dawn, noon, and sunset; also
    -त्रिसवनम् (
    -षवणम्); Ms.11.216.
    -संध्यम् ind. at the time of the three Sandhyas; सान्निध्यं पुष्करे येषां त्रिसन्ध्यं कुरुनन्दन Mb.
    -सप्तत a. seventy-third.
    -सप्ततिः f. seventy-three.
    -सप्तन्, -सप्त a. (pl.) three times 7, i. e. 21.
    -सम a. (in geom.) having three equal sides, equilateral.
    -सरः milk, sesamum and rice boiled together.
    -सरकम् drinking wine thrice ('सरकं शीधुपात्रे स्यात् शीधुपाने च शीधुनि' इति विश्वः); प्रातिभं त्रिसरकेण गतानाम् Śi.1.12.
    -सर्गः the creation of the 3 Guṇas; Bhāg.1.1.1.
    -साधन a. having a threefold causality; R.3.13.
    -सामन् a. singing 3 Sāmans (an उद्गातृ); उद्गाता तत्र संग्रामे त्रिसामा दुन्दुभिर्नृप Mb.12.98.27.
    -साम्यम् an equilibrium of the three (qualities); Bhāg.2.7.4.
    -सुपर्णः, -र्णम् 1 N. of the three Ṛigvedic verses (Rv.1.114.3-5).
    -2 N. of T. Ār.1.48-5; -a. familiar with or reciting these verses; Ms.3.185.
    -स्थली the three sacred places: काशी, प्रयाग, and गया.
    -स्थानम् the head, neck and chest to- gether; तन्त्रीलयसमायुक्तं त्रिस्थानकरणान्वितम् Rām.7.71.15. -a.
    1 having 3 dwelling places.
    -2 extending through the 3 worlds.
    -स्रोतस् f. an epithet of the Ganges; त्रिस्रोतसं वहति यो गगनप्रतिष्ठाम् Ś.7.6; R.1.63; Ku.7.15.
    -सीत्य, -हल्य a. ploughed thrice (as a field).
    -हायण a. three years old.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > त्रि _tri

  • 71 देव _dēva

    देव a. (
    -वी f.) [दिव्-अच्]
    1 Divine, celestial; Bg.11. 11; Ms.12.117.
    -2 Shining; यज्ञस्य देवमृत्विजम् Rv.1.1.1.
    -3 Fit to be worshipped or honoured.
    -वः 1 A god, deity; एको देवः केशवो वा शिवो वा Bh.3.12.
    -2 (a) The god of rain, an epithet of Indra; as in द्वादश वर्षाणि देवो न ववर्ष; अवर्षयद्देवः Rām.1.9.18; काले च देशे च प्रववर्ष देवः Bu. Ch.2.7. (b) A cloud.
    -3 A divine man, Brāhmaṇa, as in भूदेव.
    -4 A king, ruler, as in मनुष्यदेव; तां देवसमितिं (अभ्या- गच्छत्) Mb.3.13.22.
    -5 A title affixed to the names of Bārhmaṇas; as in गोविन्ददेव, पुरुषोत्तमदेव &c.
    -6 (In dramas) A title of honour used in addressing a king, ('My lord', 'Your majesty'); ततश्च देव Ve.4; यथाज्ञापयति देवः &c.
    -7 Quicksilver.
    -8 The Supreme Spirit; हित्वा च देहं प्रविशन्ति देवं दिवौकसो द्यामिव पार्थ सांख्याः Mb.12.31.112.
    -9 A fool
    -1 A child.
    -11 A man following any particular business.
    -12 A lover.
    -13 Emulation.
    -14 Sport, play.
    -15 A husband's brother (cf. देवृ, देवर).
    -16 A lancer.
    -वम् An organ of sense; देवानां प्रभवो देवो मनसश्च त्रिलोककृत् Mb.14.41.3. [cf. L. deus; Gr. deos.].
    -Comp. -अंशः a partial incarnation of god.
    -अगारः, -रम् a temple.
    -अङ्गना a celestial damsel, an apsaras.
    -अतिदेवः, -अधिदेवः 1 the highest god.
    -2 an epithet of (1) Śiva. (2) Buddha. (3) Viṣṇu. देवातिदेवो भगवान् प्रसूतिरंशे हरिर्यस्य जगत्प्रणेता Hariv.
    -अधिपः 1 an epithet of Indra.
    -2 the supreme god.
    -अनीकम् an army of celestials.
    -अनुचरः, -अनुयायिन् m. an attendant or follower of a god; निशम्य देवानुचरस्य वाचं मनुष्यदेवः पुनरप्युवाच R.2.52.
    -अन्धस् n.,
    अन्नम् 1 the food of gods, divine food, ambrosia.
    -2 food that has been first offered to an idol; see Ms.5.7 and Kull. thereon.
    -अभीष्ट a.
    1 liked by or dear to gods.
    -2 sacred or dedicated to a deity. (
    -ष्टा) piper betel.
    -अरण्यम् the garden of gods, the Nandana gar- den; अलमुद्द्योतयामासुर्देवारण्यमिवर्तवः R.1.8.
    -अरिः a demon.
    -अर्चनम्, -ना 1 the worship of gods.
    -2 idolatry.
    -अर्पणम् 1 an offering to the god.
    -2 the Veda; पृथग्- भूतानि चान्यानि यानि देवार्पणानि च Mb.13.86.17 (see com.).
    -आवसथः a temple.
    -अश्वः an epithet of उच्चैःश्रवस्, the horse of Indra.
    -आक्रीडः 'the garden of the gods', Nandana garden.
    -आजीवः, -आजीविन् m. an attendant upon an idol.
    -2 a low Brāhmaṇa subsisting by attendance upon an idol and upon the offerings made to it.
    -आत्मन् a.
    1 consecrated, holy, sacred.
    -2 of a divine nature. (-m.)
    1 the divine soul; ते ध्यानयोगानुगता$ पश्यन् देवात्मशक्तिं स्वगुणैर्निगूढाम् Śvet. Up.1.3.
    -2 the holy fig-tree.
    -आयतनम् a temple; Ms.4.46; न देवा- यतनं गच्छेत् कदाचिद् वा$प्रदक्षिणम् । न पीडयेद् वा वस्त्राणि न देवा- यतनेष्वपि ॥ Kūrma P.
    -आयुधम् 1 a divine weapon.
    -2 rainbow.
    -आयुष्म् the life-time of a god.
    -आलयः 1 heaven.
    -2 a temple.
    -आवासः 1 heaven.
    -2 the holy fig-tree (अश्वत्थ).
    -3 a temple.
    -4 the Sumeru mountain.
    -आहारः nectar, ambrosia.
    -इज् a. (nom. sing. देवेट्-ड्) worshipping the gods.
    -इज्यः an epithet of Bṛihaspati, preceptor of the gods.
    -इज्जः 1 an epithet of Indra.
    -2 of Śiva.
    -इष्ट a. dear to gods. (
    -ष्टः) bdellium. (
    -ष्टा) the wild lime tree.
    -ईशः an epithet of (1) Indra. (2) Śiva. (3) Viṣṇu. (4) Brahman. (
    -शी) N. of Durgā also of Devakī mother of Kṛiṣṇa.
    -ईश्वरः N. of (1) Śiva. (2) Indra.
    -उद्यानम् 1 divine garden.
    -2 The Nandana garden.
    -3 a garden near a temple.
    -ऋषिः (देवर्षिः)
    1 a deified saint, divine sage such as अत्रि, भृगु, पुलस्त्य, अङ्गिरस् &c.; एवंवादिनि देवर्षौ Ku.6.84 (i. e. अङ्गिरस्); अथ देवऋषी राजन् संपरेतं नृपात्मजम् Bhāg.; आब्रह्मभुवनाल्लोका देवर्षिपितृमानवाः । तृप्यन्तु पितरः सर्वे मातृमातामहा- दयाः Tarpaṇamantra.
    -2 an epithet of Narada; देवर्षीणां च नारदः Bg.1.13.26.
    -ओकस् n. the mountain Meru or Sumeru.
    -कन्या a celestial damsel, a nymph; also देवकन्यका.
    -कर्दमाः sandal, aloe wood, camphor, saffron pounded together and made into a paste.
    -कर्मन् n.,
    -कार्यम् 1 a religious act or rite, divine command; अनुष्ठितदेवकार्यम् R.12.13.
    -2 the worship of gods.
    -काष्ठम् the Devadāru tree.
    -किरी N. of a Rāgiṇī; ललिता मालती गौरी नाटी देवकिरी तथा । मेघरागस्य रागिण्यो भवन्तीमाः सुमध्यमाः ॥
    -कुटम् a temple.
    -कुण़्डम् a natural spring.
    -कुलम् 1 a temple.
    -2 a race of gods.
    -3 a group of gods.
    -कुल्या the celestial Ganges.
    -कुसुमम् cloves; एलां च देवकुसुमं त्वक्पत्रं देवदारु च Śiva. B.3.14.
    -खातम्, -खातकम् 1 a natural hollow among moun- tains.
    -2 a natural pond or reservoir; Ms.4.23.
    -3 a pond near a temple. ˚बिल a cavern, chasm.
    -गणः a class of gods.
    -गणिका an apsaras; q. v.
    -गतिः the path of देवलोक; अनुज्ञातश्च रामेण ययौ देवगतिं मुनिः A. Rām. 2.1.4.
    -गन्धर्वः an epithet of Nārada. (
    -र्वम्) a particular mode of singing.
    -गर्जनम् thunder.
    -गर्भः see हिरण्यगर्भ; Rām.2.4.23.
    -गायनः a celestial choris- ter, a Gandharva.
    -गान्धारी N. of a Rāgiṇī गान्धारी देवगान्धारी मालवी श्रीश्च सारवी । रामकीर्यपि रागिण्यः श्रीरागस्य प्रिया इमाः ॥
    -गिरिः 1 N. of a mountain; cf. Me.44.
    -2 N. of a town (Daulatabad).
    -गिरी f. N. of a Rāgiṇī.
    -गुरुः 1 an epithet of Kaśyapa (the father of gods).
    -2 of Bṛihaspati (the preceptor of gods).
    -गुही an epithet of Sarasvatī or of a place situated on it.
    -गुह्यम् 1 a secret only known by gods.
    -2 death.
    -गृहम् 1 a temple.
    -2 the place of a king.
    -3 a planetary sphere.
    -ग्रहः a class of demons who causes harmless madness.
    -चरितम् the course of action or practices of the gods; न देवचरितं चरेत्.
    -चर्या the worship or service of gods.
    -चिकित्सकौ (du.) Aśvins, the twin physicians of gods.
    -छन्दः a pearl-necklace having 81, 1 or 18 strings; शतमष्टयुतं हारो देवच्छन्दो ह्यशीतिरेकयुता Bṛi. S.81.32.
    -जनः the gods collectively. ˚विद्या the science of music, dance, other arts &c.; Ch. Up.7.1.2.
    -जातम् a class of gods.
    -जामिः f. a sister of the gods; देवजामीनां पुत्रो$सि Av. 6.46.1.
    -तरुः 1 the holy fig-tree.
    -2 one of the trees of paradise. (i. e. मन्दार, पारिजात, सन्तान, कल्प and हरि- चन्दन); पञ्चैते देवतरवो मन्दारः पारिजातकः । सन्तानः कल्पवृक्षश्च पुंसि वा हरिचन्दनम् ॥ Ak.
    -3 the tree in a village (चैत्यवृक्ष) where the villagers usually meet (Mar. पार).
    -तर्पणम् offerings of water, part of the सन्ध्या ceremony.
    -ताडः 1 fire.
    -2 an epithet of Rāhu.
    -तातः 1 a sacrifice.
    -2 N. of Kaśyapa.
    -तातिः 1 a god.
    -2 divine service; स नो यक्षद् देवताता यजीयान् Rv.3.19.1.
    -तीर्थम् 1 the right moment for the worship of gods.
    -2 the tips of the fingers sacred to gods.
    -दत्त a.
    1 god-given, grant- ed by the gods.
    -2 given to the gods (as a village, &c.).
    (-त्तः) 1 N. of the conch-shell of Arjuna; देवदत्तं धनञ्जयः (दध्मौ) Bg.1.15.
    -2 a certain person (used in speaking of men indefinitely); मुक्तस्ततो यदि बन्धाद्देवदत्त उपाच्छिनत्ति Bhāg.5.14.24; देवदत्तः पचति, पिनो देवदत्तो दिवा न भुङ्क्ते &c.
    -3 one of the vital airs exhaled in yawning; देवदत्तो विजृम्भणे. ˚अग्रजः N. of Buddha.
    -दर्शन a. visiting the gods. (
    -नः) N. of Nārada; यथा प्राह नारदो देवदर्शनः Bhāg.2.8.1.
    -दारु m., n. a species of pine; गङ्गाप्रवाहोक्षित- देवदारु Ku.1.54; R.2.36.
    -दासः a servant or attendant upon a temple.
    (-सी) 1 a female in the service of gods or a temple.
    -2 a courtezan (employed as a dancer in a temple).
    -3 the wild citron tree.
    -दीपः the eye.
    -दुन्दुभिः 1 divine drum; देवदुन्दुभिनिर्घोषो पुष्पवृष्टिश्च खात् पतन् Rām.
    -2 the holy basil with red flowers.
    -3 an epi- thet of Indra.
    -दूतः a divine envoy or messenger, an angel.
    -देवः 1 an epithet of Brahman; Rām.1.43.1.
    -2 of Śiva; अयाचितारं न हि देवदेवमद्रिः सुतां ग्राहयितुं शशाक Ku.1.52.
    -3 of Viṣṇu; Bg.1.15.
    -4 of Gaṇeśa; दृष्टप्रभावो वरदो देवदेवो विनायकः Ks.2.55.
    -दैवत्य a. destined for the god; Ms.2.189.
    -द्रोणी a procession with idols.
    -धर्मः a religious duty or office.
    -धानी the city of Indra; तां देवधानीं स वरुथिनीपतिर्बहिः समन्ताद्रुरुधे पृतन्यया Bhāg. 8.15.23.
    -धान्यम् a kind of grass-grain (Mar. देवभात).
    -धिष्ण्यम् a chariot of the gods (विमान); Bhāg.1. 82.7.
    -नक्षत्रम् N. of the first 14 नक्षत्रs in the southern quarter (opp. to यमनक्षत्रम्).
    -नदी 1 the Ganges.
    -2 any holy river; Ms.2.17.
    -नन्दिन् m. N. of the door- keeper of Indra.
    -2 N. of a grammarian.
    -नागरी N. of the character in which Sanskrit is usually written.
    -नाथः Śiva.
    -निकायः 1 'residence of gods', paradise, heaven; तं तुष्टुवुर्देवनिकायकेतवः Bhāg.1.27.25.
    -2 a host or assembly of gods; Ms.1.36.
    -निन्दकः a blasphe- mer, unbeliever, heretic, atheist.
    -निन्दा heresy, athe- ism.
    -निर्माल्यम् 1 a garland remaining from a sacrifice.
    -निर्मित a. 'god-created', natural.
    -पतिः an epithet of Indra.
    -पादाः 'the royal feet or presence', an honorific term for a king; देवपादाः प्रमाणम्.
    -पथः 1 'heavenly passage', heaven, firmament दिव्यो देवपथो ह्येष नात्र गच्छन्ति मानुषाः Mb.
    -2 the milky way.
    -पशुः any animal con- secrated to a deity.
    -पात्रम् an epithet of Agni.
    -पुर्, -पुरी f. an epithet of Amarāvatī, the city of Indra.
    -पुरोहितः 1 a domestic priest of the gods.
    -2 the planet Jupiter (बृहस्पति).
    -पुष्पम् cloves.
    -पूज्यः an epithet of Bṛihaspati.
    -प्रतिकृतिः f.,
    -प्रतिमा an idol, the image of a deity.
    -प्रश्नः 'consulting deities', astrology, for- tune-telling.
    -प्रसूत a. good-produced (water); Av.6. 1.2.
    -प्रियः 'dear to the gods', an epithet of Śiva; (देवानांप्रियः an irreg. comp. meaning-
    1 a goat.
    -2 a fool, idiot like a brute breast, as in ते$प्यतात्पर्यज्ञा देवानांप्रियाः K. P.
    -3 an ascetic, who renounces the world).
    -बलिः an oblation to the gods.
    -बाहुः 1 N. of a king in the Yadu race.
    -2 N. of a sage; देवबाहुः शतधनुः कृतवर्मेति तत्सुताः Bhāg.
    -ब्रह्मन् m. an epithet of Nārada.
    -ब्राह्मणः 1 a Brāhmaṇa who lives on the proceeds of a temple.
    -2 a venerable Brāhmaṇa.
    -भक्तिः worship or service of the gods.
    -भवनम् 1 the heaven.
    -2> a temple.
    -3 the holy fig-tree.
    -भागः the northern hemisphere.
    -भ m. a god; (-f.) heaven.
    -भूमिः f. heaven; पितुः प्रदेशा- स्तव देवभूमयः Ku.5.45.
    -भूतिः f. an epithet of the Ganges.
    -भूयम् divinity, godhead; विदितमेव भवतां...... परां निर्वृतिमुपेत्य देवभूयं गताः सर्वे न पूर्वपुरुषा इति Rām. Champū.
    -भृत् m. an epithet of
    1 Viṣṇu.
    -2 of Indra.
    -भोगः Pleasure of the gods, heavenly joy; अन्नन्ति दिव्यान् दिवि देवभोगान् Bg.9.2.
    -भोज्यम् nectar.
    -मणिः 1 the jewel of Viṣṇu called कौस्तुभ.
    -2 the sun.
    -3 a curl of hair on a horse's neck; आवर्तिनः शुभफल- प्रदशुक्तियुक्ताः संपन्नदेवमणयो भृतरन्ध्रभागाः (अश्वाः) Śi.5.4; N.1.58.
    -मधु n. divine honey; असौ वा आदित्यो देवमधु Ch. Up.3.1.1.
    -मातृ f. N. of Aditi, mother of gods.
    -मातृक a. 'having the god of rain or clouds as foster-mother', watered only by the clouds, depending on rain-water and not on irrigation, deprived of every other kind of water (as a country); देशो नद्यम्बुवृष्ट्यम्बु- संपन्नव्रीहिपालितः । स्यान्नदीमातृको देवमातृकश्च यथाक्रमम् ॥ Ak.; cf. also वितन्वति क्षेममदेवमातृकाः (i. e. नदीमातृकाः) चिराय तस्मिन् कुरवश्चकासते Ki.1. 17.
    -मानकः the jewel of Viṣṇu called कौस्तुभ.
    -माया the Māyā of gods; ते दुस्तराम- तितरन्ति च देवमायाम् Bhāg.
    -मार्गः the air or sky.
    -मासः the eighth month of pregnancy.
    -मुनिः a divine sage.
    -यजनम् 1 a sacrificial place, a place where a sacrifice is performed; ततस्ते देवयजनं ब्राह्मणाः स्वर्णलाङ्गलैः (कृष्ट्वा) Bhāg.1.74.12. देवयजनसंभवे सीते U.4.
    -2 a place of worship; मण्डलं देवयजनं दीक्षासंस्कार आत्मनः Bhāg.12.11.17.
    -यजि a. making oblations to gods.
    -यज्ञः a sacrifice to the superior gods made by oblations to fire, or through fire to the gods; (one of the five daily sacri- fices of a Brāhmaṇa; see Ms.3.81,85 and पञ्चयज्ञ also).
    -यज्यम्, -यज्या a sacrifice.
    -यात्रा 'an idol- procession,' any sacred festival when the idols are carried in procession; केनापि देवयात्रागतेन सिद्धादेशेन साधुना मत्समक्षमादिष्टा M.5.12-13.
    -यान bestowing मोक्ष; यज्ञस्य देवयानस्य मेध्याय हविषे नृप Bhāg.8.8.2.
    -नः the path leading to मोक्ष; सत्येन पन्था विततो देवयानः Muṇḍ.3.1.6.
    -यानम् a celestial car.
    -युगम् 1 the first of the four ages of the world; also called कृतयुग, सनत्कुमारो भगवान् पुरा देवयुगे प्रभुः Rām.1.11.11.
    -2 an age of the gods comprising four ages of men.
    -योनिः 1 a super- human being, a demigod; विद्याधरो$प्सरोयक्षरक्षोगन्धर्वकिन्नराः । पिशाचो गुह्यकः सिद्धो भूतो$मी देवयोनयः ॥ Ak.
    -2 a being of divine origin.
    -3 fuel used in kindling fire (f. also).
    -योषा an apsaras.
    -रथः a car for carrying the image of god in procession.
    -थम् a day's journey for the sun's chariot.
    -रहस्यम् a divine mystery.
    -राज्, -राजः 1 an epithet of Indra; Rām.7.6.6.
    -2 a king.
    -3 N. of Buddha.
    -रातः 1 an epithet of Parīkṣit.
    -2 a kind of swan or crane.
    -राष्ट्रम् N. of an empire in the Deccan.
    -लक्ष्मम् the Brāhmanical cord.
    -लता the Navamallikā or double jasmine plant.
    -लिङ्गम् the image or statue of a deity; Bhāg.3.17.13.
    -लोकः heaven, paradise; देवलोकस्य चर्त्विजः (प्रभुः) Ms.4.182.
    -वक्त्रम् an epithet of fire.
    -वर्त्मन् n. the sky or atmosphere.
    -वर्धकिः, -शिल्पिन् m. Viśvakarman, the architect of gods.
    -वाणी 'divine voice', a voice from heaven.
    -वाहनः an epithet of Agni.
    -विद्या 1 divine science; Ch. Up.7.1.2.
    -2 the science of Nirukta or etymology; ibid.
    -विभागः the northern hemisphere.
    -विश् f.,
    -विशा a deity.
    -वीतिः food of the gods.
    -वृक्षः the Mandāra tree.
    -व्यचस् a. Ved. occupied by the gods.
    -व्रतम् 1 a religious observance, any religious vow.
    -2 the favourite food of the gods. (
    -तः) an epithet of
    1 Bhīṣma; ततो विनशनं प्रागाद्यत्र देवव्रतो$पतत् Bhāg.1.9.1.
    -2 Kārtikeya.
    -व्रतत्वम् celibacy (ब्रह्मचारिव्रत); देवव्रतत्वं विज्ञाप्य Mb.5.172.19.
    -शत्रुः a demon; स देवशत्रूनिव देवराजः Mb.
    -शुनी an epithet of Saramā, the bitch of the gods.
    -शेखर the damanaka tree (Mar. दवणा).
    -शेषम् the remnants of a sacrifice offered to gods.
    -श्रीः m. a sacrifice. (f.) Lakṣmī.
    -श्रुतः an epithet of
    1 Viṣṇu.
    -2 Nārada.
    -3 a sacred treatise.
    -4 a god in general.
    -संसद् f. देवसभा q. v.
    -सत्यम् divine truth, established order of the gods.
    -संध a. divine.
    -सभा 1 an assembly of the gods (सुधर्मन्).
    -2 a council of a king, council-chamber.
    -3 a gambling-house.
    -सभ्यः 1 a gambler.
    -2 a fre- quenter of gaming-houses.
    -3 an attendant on a deity.
    -4 the keeper of a gambling-house.
    -सहा 1 rules of begging alms (? भिक्षासूत्र); L. D. B.
    -2 N. of a plant.
    -सायुज्यम् identification or unification with a deity, conjunction with the gods, deification.
    -सिंह an epithet of Śiva.
    -सुषिः a tube or cavity (in the heart) leading to the gods; cf. उदान, तस्य ह वा एतस्य हृदयस्य पञ्च देवसुषयः Ch. Up.3.13.1.
    -सू N. of 8 deities (अग्नि, सोम, सवितृ, रुद्र, बृहस्पति, इन्द्र, मित्र and वरुण).
    -सृष्टा an intoxicating drink.
    -सेना 1 the army of gods.
    -2 N. of the wife of Skanda; स्कन्देन साक्षादिव देवसेनाम् R.7.1. (Malli.:-- देवसेना = स्कन्दपत्नी perhaps it merely means 'the army of the gods' personified as Skanda's wife). ˚पतिः, ˚प्रियः an epithet of Kārtikeya.
    -स्वम् 'property of gods', property applicable to religious purposes or endowments; यद्धनं यज्ञशीलानां देवस्वं तद्विदु- र्बुधाः Ms.11.2,26. ˚अपहरणम् sacrilege.
    -सावर्णिः the 13th Manu; मनुस्त्रयोदशो भाव्यो देवसावर्णिरात्मवान् Bhāg. 8.13.3.
    -हविस् n. an animal offered to gods at a sacrifice.
    -हिंसकः an enemy of gods.
    -हूः the left ear; Bhāg.4.25.51.
    -हूतिः f.
    1 invocation of the gods.
    -2 N. of a daughter of Manu Svāyambhuva and wife of Kardama.
    -हेडनम् an offence against the gods.
    -हेतिः a divine weapon.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > देव _dēva

  • 72 वाच् _vāc

    वाच् f. [वच्-क्विप् दीर्घो$संप्रसारणं च Uṇ.2.67]
    1 A word, sound, an expression (opp. अर्थ); वागर्थाविव संपृक्तौ वागर्थप्रतिपत्तये R.1.1.
    -2 Words, talk, language, speech; वाचि पुण्यापुण्यहेतवः Māl.4; लौकिकानां हि साधूनामर्थं वागनुवर्तते । ऋषीणां पुनराद्यानां वाचमर्थो$नुधावति U.1.1; विनिश्चितार्थामिति वाचमाददे Ki.1.3 'spoke these words', 'spoke as fol- lows'; R.1.49; Śi.2.13,23; Ku.2.3.
    -3 A voice, sound; अशरीरिणी वागुदचरत् U.2; मनुष्यवाचा R.2.33.
    -4 An assertion, a statement.
    -5 An assurance, a pro- mise.
    -6 A phrase, proverb, saying.
    -7 N. of Sara- svatī, the goddess of speech.
    -Comp. -अपहारकः (वागपहारकः) 1 a 'stealer of speech', a reader of pro- hibited texts; Ms.11.51.
    -2 a liar (मिथ्यावादी).
    -अपेत (वागपेत) a. dumb.
    -अर्थः (वागर्थः) a word and its meaning; वागर्थाविव संपृक्तौ R.1.1; see above.
    -असिः cutting speech (cutting like a sword); स्फुरन्नसाधोर्विवृणोति वागसिः Ki.14.12.
    -आडम्बरः, (-वागाडम्बरः) verbosity, bombast.
    -आत्मन् a. (
    वागात्मन्) consisting of words; ऋषे प्रबुद्धो$सि वागात्मनि ब्रह्मणि U.2.
    -ईशः (वागीशः) 1 an orator, an eloquent man.
    -2 an epithet of Bṛihaspati, the preceptor of the gods; वागीशाद्याः सुमनसः Nyāyamāla.
    -3 an epithet of Brahman; वागीशं (धातारं) वाग्भिरर्थ्याभिः प्रणिपत्योपतस्थिरे Ku.2.3.
    -4 the lunar mansion called Puṣya. (
    -शा) N. of Sarasvatī.
    -ईश्वरः (वागीश्वरः) 1 an orator, eloquent man.
    -2 an epithet of Brahman. (
    -री) Sarasvatī, the goddess of speech.
    -उत्तरम् (वागु- त्तरम्) end of speech.
    -ऋषभः, (वागृषभः) 'eminent in speech', an eloquent or learned man.
    -कलहः- (वाक्कलहः) a quarrel, strife.
    -कीरः (वाक्कीरः) a wife's brother.
    -केलिः, -ली (वाक्केलिः -ली) witty conversation.
    -गुदः (वाग्गुदः) a kind of bird; Ms.12.64.
    -गुणः (वाग्गुणः) a merit or excellence of speech; (35 such merits are enumerated by Hemachandra).
    -गुम्फः (pl.) artificial language.
    -गुलिः, -गुलिकः (
    वाग्गुलिः &c.) the betel-bearer of a king &c.; cf. ताम्बूलकरङ्कवाहिन्.
    - चपल a. (
    -वाक्चपल) chattering, frivolous or inconside- rate in talk.
    -चापल्यम् (वाक्चापल्यम्) idle or frivo- lous talk, chattering, gossiping.
    -छलम् (वाक्छलम्) 'dishonesty in words', an evasive reply, a prevarica- tion; एतावदेवास्ति मे वाक्छलम् Mu.2; केनेदममृतं मे वाक्छलाद् वृष्टम् K.33.
    -जालम् (वाग्जालम्) bombast, empty talk; अनिर्लोडितकार्यस्य वाग्जालं वाग्मिनो वृथा Śi.2.27.
    -जीवमः (वाग्जीवनः) a buffon; Kau. A.2.1.
    -डम्बरः (वाग्ड- म्बरः) 1 bombast.
    -2 eloquent language.
    -दण्डः (वाग्दण्डः) 1 reproachful words, reprimand, reproof.
    -2 restraint of speech, control over words; cf. त्रिदण्ड Ms.12.1.
    -दत्त (वाग्दत्त) a. promised, affianced, betrothed. (
    -त्ता) an affianced or betrothed virgin; Kull. on Ms.5.72.
    -दरिद्र (वाग्दरिद्र) a. 'poor in words', i. e. speaking little.
    -दलम् (वाग्दलम्) a lip.
    -दानम् (वाग्दानम्) betrothal; Ms.5.72 (Kull.).
    -दुष्ट a.
    (वाग्दुष्ट) 1 abusive, scurrilous, using abusive words; Ms.8.345.
    -2 using ungrammatical language.
    (-ष्टः) 1 a defamer.
    -2 a Brāhmaṇa not invested with the sacred thread at the proper time of his life.
    -देवता, -देवी (वाग्देवता, वाग्देवी) Sarasvatī, the goddess of speech; वाग्देवतायाः सांमुख्यमाधत्ते S. D.1. ˚कुलम् science, learning.
    -दोषः (वाग्दोषः) 1 the utterance of a (dis- agreeable) sound; द्वीपिचर्मपरिच्छन्नो वाग्दोषाद् गर्दभो हतः H. B.
    -2 abuse, defamation.
    -3 an ungrammatical speech.
    -निबन्धन (वाग्निबन्धन) a. depending on words.
    -निमि- त्तम् (वाङ्निमित्तम्) Prognostications; तच्चाकर्ण्य वाङ्- निमित्तज्ञः पितरि सुतरां जीविताशां शिथिलीचकार Hch. V.
    -निश्चयः (वाङ्निश्चयः) affiance by word of month, marriage contract.
    -निष्ठा (वाङ्निष्ठा) faithfulness (to one's word or promise).
    -पटु a. (
    वाक्पटु) skilful in speech, eloquent.
    -पति a. (
    वाक्पति) eloquent; oratorical.
    (-तिः) 1 N. of Bṛihaspati (in this sense वाचसांपतिः is also used).
    -2 the constellation Puṣya.
    -पथः(वाक्पथः) 1 a moment fit for speech.
    -2 the range of speech.
    -पाटवम् (वाक्पाटवम्) eloquence.
    -पारीणः (वाक्पा- रीणः) beyond the range of speech; वाक्पारीणरुचिः स चेन्मुखमयं पद्मः प्रिये तावकम् N.22.14.
    -पारुष्यम् (वाक्पारु- ष्यम्) 1 severity of language.
    -2 violence in words, abusive or scurrilous language, defamation; एवं दण्डविधिः प्रोक्तो वाक्पारुष्यस्य तत्त्वतः Ms.8.278.
    -प्रचोदनम् (वाक्प्रचो- दनम्) an order expressed in words.
    -प्रतोदः (वाक्प्र- तोदः) 'the goad of words', goading or taunting lan- guage.
    -प्रलापः (वाक्प्रलापः) eloquence.
    -बन्धनम् (वाग्बन्धनम्) stopping the speech, silencing; व्रीडार्ता प्रकरोति दाडिमपलव्याजेन वाग्बन्धनम् Amaru.16.
    -भट (वाग्भटः) N. of a writer on medicine.
    - मनस n. (the duel
    -वाङ्मनसी in Vedic language) speech and mind; अथैनं तुष्टुवुः स्तुत्यमवाङ्मनसगोचरम् R.1.15; अतीतः पन्थानं तव च महिमा वाङ्मनसयोः Śiva-mahimna 2.
    -मात्रम् (वाङ्मात्रम्) mere words.
    -मुखम् (वाङ्मुखम्) the beginning or introduction of a speech, an exordium, a preface.
    -यत a. (
    -वाग्यत) one who has controlled or curbed his speech, silent.
    -यमः (वाग्यमः) one who has con- trolled his speech, a sage.
    -यामः (वाग्यामः) a dumb man.
    -युद्धम् (वाग्युद्धम्) a war of words, (hot) debate or discussion, controversy.
    -रोधः (वाग्रोधः) stopping the speech, silencing.
    -वज्रः (वाग्वज्रः) 1 adamantine words; अहह दारुणो वाग्वज्रः U.1.
    -2 harsh or severe language.
    -विद् a. (
    वाग्विद्) eloquent.
    -विदग्ध a. (
    वाग्विदग्ध) skilled in speech. (
    -ग्धा) a sweet-speaking or fascinating woman.
    -विनिःसृत a. (
    वाग्विनिःसृत) put forth by speech; वाच्यर्था नियताः सर्वे वाङ्मूला वाग्वि- निःसृताः । तां तु यः स्तेनयेद्वाचं स सर्वस्तेयकृन्नरः ॥ Ms.4.256.
    -विभवः (वाग्विभवः) stock or provision of words, power of description, command of language; नास्ति मे वाग्विभवः प्रशंसितुम् V.3; रघूणामन्वयं वक्ष्ये तनुवाग्विभवो$पि सन् R.1.9; Māl.1.26.
    -विलासः (वाग्विलासः) graceful or elegant speech.
    -विलासिन् m. (
    वाग्विलासिन्) pi- geon, dove.
    -विस्तरः (वाग्विस्तरः) prolixity.
    -वीरः (वाग्वीरः) master of speech.
    -व्ययः (वाग्व्ययः) waste of breath.
    -व्यवहारः (वाग्व्यवहारः) verbal or oral discussion; प्रयोगप्रधानं हि नाट्यशास्त्रं किमत्र वाग्व्यवहारेण M.1.
    -व्यापारः (वाग्व्यापारः) 1 the manner of speaking.
    -2 the style or habit of speaking.
    -3 customary phra- seology or mode of talking.
    -शलाका (वाक्शलाका) in- jurious speech.
    -शल्यम्(वाक्शल्यम्) = वाक्शलाका. -शस्त्रम् (वाक्शस्त्रम्) a curse; वाक्शस्त्रं वै ब्राह्मणस्य तेन हन्यादरीन् द्विजः Ms.11.33.
    -संतक्षणम् sarcastic remarks; असारस्य वाक्संतक्षणैः... अपवाहनम् Dk.2.2.
    -संयमः (वाक्संयमः), -संवरः (वाक्संवरः) restraint or control of speech.
    -संगः (वाक्संगः) 1 impeded or slow speech.
    -2 para- lysis of speech.
    -सारः (वाक्सारः) eloquence.
    -सिद्धम् (वाक्सिद्धम्) supernatural perfection of speech.
    -स्तम्भः (वाक्स्तम्भः) paralysis of speech.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > वाच् _vāc

  • 73 वाल्मिकिः _vālmikiḥ _वाल्मीकः _vālmīkḥ _वाल्मीकिः _vālmīkiḥ

    वाल्मिकिः वाल्मीकः वाल्मीकिः [वल्मीके भवः अण् इञ् वा] N. of a celebrated sage, and author of the Rāmāyaṇa; कवीन्दुं नौमि वाल्मीकिं यस्य रामायणीं कथाम् । चन्द्रिकामिव चिन्वन्ति चकोरा इव साधवः ॥ Udb. [He was a Brāhmaṇa by birth, but being abandoned by his parents in his childhood, he was found by some wild mountaineers who taught him the art of thieving. He soon became an adept in the art, and pursued his business of plun- dering and killing (where necessary) travellers for several years. One day he saw a great sage whom he asked on pain of death to deliver up his possessions. But the sage told him to go home and ask his wife and children if they were ready to become his part- ners in the innumerable iniquities that he had com- mitted. He accordingly went home, but returned dis- mayed at their unwillingness. The sage then told him to repeat the word marā (which is Rāma inverted) and disappeared. The robber continued to repeat it for years together without moving from the place, so that his body was covered up with ant-hills. But the same sage reappeared and got him out, and as he issued from the 'valmika' he was called Vālmiki, and became afterwards an eminent sage. One day while he was performing his ablutions, he saw one of a pair of Krauncha birds being killed by a fowler, at which he cursed the wretch in words which unconsiously took the form of a verse in the Anuṣṭubh metre. This was a new mode of composition, and at the command of the god Brahman he composed the first poem the Rāmāyaṇa. When Sītā was abandoned by Rāma, he gave her shelter under his roof, and brought up her two sons. He afterwards restored them all to Rāma.]

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > वाल्मिकिः _vālmikiḥ _वाल्मीकः _vālmīkḥ _वाल्मीकिः _vālmīkiḥ

  • 74 विधा _vidhā

    1
    विधा 3 U.
    1 To do, make, bring about, effect, ac- complish, perform, cause, produce, occasion; यथाक्रमं पुंसवनादिकाः क्रिया धृतेश्च धीरः सदृशीर्व्यधत्त सः R.3.1; तन्नो देवा विधेयासुः Bk.19.2; विधेयासुर्देवाः परमरमणीयां परिणतिम् Māl.6.7; प्रायः शुभं च विदधात्यशुभं च जन्तोः सर्वंकषा भगवती भवितव्यतैव 1.23; ये द्वे कालं विधत्तः Ś.1.1 'cause, produce, or regulate time'; तस्य तस्याचलां श्रद्धां तामेव विदधाम्यहम् Bg.7.21; R.2.38;3.66; Ve.1.1; Ki.1.3;16.62;18. 28; (these senses may be further modified according to the noun with which विधा is used; cf. कृ).
    -2 To lay down, ordain, prescribe, fix, settle, command, enjoin; प्राङ्नाभिवर्धनात् पुंसो जातकर्म विधीयते Ms.2.29;3.19; Y.1. 72; शूद्रस्य तु सवर्णैव नान्या भार्या विधीयते Ms.9.157;3.118; पाणिनिश्च क्रियाफलस्य कर्तृगामित्वे सत्यात्मनेपदं विदधाति J. N. V.
    -3 To make, form, shape, create, manufacture; तं वेधा विदधे नूनं महाभूतसमाधिना R.1.29; अङ्गानि चम्पकदलैः स विधाय नूनं कान्ते कथं घटितवानुपलेन चेतः Ś. Til.3.
    -4 To appoint, depute (as a minister).
    -5 To put on, wear; Pt.1.
    -6 To fix upon, direct towards (as mind &c); योगे धैर्य- समाधिसिद्धिसुलभे बुद्धिं विधद्ध्वं बुधाः Bh.3.54; व्यवसायात्मिका बुद्धिः समाधौ न विधीयते Bg.2.44.
    -7 To arrange, put in order.
    -8 To make ready, prepare.
    -9 To settle, fix, establish; चरणारविन्दयुगलं मनसा विदधत् Bhāg.5.9.3.
    -1 To give, grant; अतीतसंख्या विहिता ममाग्निना शिलीमुखाः खाण्डव- मत्तुमिच्छता Ki.14.1.
    -11 To procure, furnish.
    -12 To place, put, lay.
    -13 To engross, consume; धने सुखकला या तु सा$पि दुःखैर्विधीयते Mb.12.177.35.
    2
    विधा 1 Mode, manner, form; मनः प्रत्यक् चित्ते सविधमव- धायात्तमरुतः Śiva-mahimna 25.
    -2 Kind, sort.
    -3 Pros- perity, affluence.
    -4 The food of elephants, horses &c.
    -5 Penetration.
    -6 Hire, wages.
    -7 Act, action.
    -8 Pronunciation.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > विधा _vidhā

  • 75 विधिः _vidhiḥ

    विधिः [विधा-कि]
    1 Doing, performance, practice, an act or action; ब्रह्मध्यानाभ्यसनविधिना योगनिद्रां गतस्य Bh.3.41; योगविधि R.8.22; अस्याः सर्गविधौ V.1.8; लेखाविधि Māl. 1.35.
    -2 Method, manner, way, means, mode; निः- साराल्पफलानि ये त्वविधिना वाञ्छन्ति दण्डोद्यमैः Pt.1.376.
    -3 A rule, commandment, any precept which enjoins some- thing for the first time (as distinguished from नियम and परिसंख्या q. q. v. v.); विधिरत्यन्तमप्राप्तौ; चिकीर्षाकृतिसाध्यत्व- हेतुधीविषयो विधिः; वहति विधिहुतं या हविः Ś.1.1.
    -4 A sacred precept or rule, ordinance, injunction, law, a sacred command, religious commandment (opp. अर्थवाद which means 'an explanatory statement coupled with legends and illustrations'; see अर्थवाद); प्रवृत्तिपरं वाक्यं विधिः, as ज्योतिष्टोमेन स्वर्गकामो यजेत; श्रद्धा वित्तं विधिश्चेति त्रितयं तत् समागतम् Ś.7.29; R.2.16.
    -5 Any religious act or ceremony, a rite, ceremony; स चेत् स्वयं कर्मसु धर्मचारिणां त्वमन्तरायो भवसि च्युतो विधिः R.3.45;1.34.
    -6 Behaviour, conduct.
    -7 Condition; V.4.
    -8 Creation, forma- tion; सामग्ऱ्यविधौ Ku.3.28; कल्याणी विधिषु विचित्रता विधातुः Ki.7.7.
    -9 The creator.
    -1 Fate, destiny, luck; विधौ वामारम्भे मम समुचितैषा परिणतिः Māl.4.4.
    -11 The food of elephants.
    -12 Time.
    -13 A physician.
    -14 N. of Viṣṇu.
    -15 Use, application.
    -16 A means, expedient for; अक्षरं गन्तुमनसो विधिं वक्ष्यामि शीघ्रगम् Mb.12. 236.13.
    -17 Any act, action.
    -Comp. -अन्तः The end or the concluding portion of an injunctive text, all the other portion of the प्रयोगविधि (pertaining to an act) except the प्रधान or मुख्य विधि which is called विध्यादि; विध्यन्तो वा प्रकृतिवत्˚ MS.7.4.1; सोमेन यजेत इति विध्यादिः । सौमिकमपि ब्राह्मणं विध्यन्तः ŚB. ibid. Also see विध्यादि.
    -आदिः m. the beginning of a विधि or injunction; the main or प्रधान injunction; वेदे$पि दर्शपूर्णमासाभ्यां यजेत इति विध्यादिः । विध्यन्तो$पि प्रधानविधिवर्जितं कृत्स्नं पौरोडाशिकं ब्राह्मणम् ŚB. on MS.7.4.1.
    -कर a. executing commands; विधिकरीरिमा वीर मुह्यतीरधरसीधुनाप्याययस्व नः Bhāg.1.31.8. -m. a servant; सो$यं ते विधिकर ईश विप्रशप्तस्तस्येदं निधन- मनुग्रहाय विद्मः Bhāg.7.8.57.
    -घ्नः a. disregarding prescribed rites or rules.
    -ज्ञ a. knowing the ritual. (
    -ज्ञः) a Brāhmaṇa versed in the ritual, a ritualist.
    -दर्शकः a priest at a sacrifice who sees that everything is done according to the precepts, and corrects any deviation from them.
    -दृष्ट, -विहित a. prescribed by rule, enjoined by law.
    -देशकः 1 = विधिदर्शक above.
    -2 a preceptor, teacher.
    -द्वैधम् diversity of rules, variance of precept or commandment.
    -पूर्वकम् ind. according to rule.
    -प्रयोगः application of a rule.
    -यज्ञः 1 a sacrifice performed according to rule; Ms.2. 85-86.
    -2 a ceremonial act of worship.
    -योगः 1 the force or influence of fate.
    -2 the observance of a rule; अनेन विधियोगेन कर्तव्यांशप्रकल्पना Ms.8.211.
    -लोपः trans- gression of a commandment.
    -वधूः f. an epithet of Sarasvatī.
    -विपर्ययः misfortune.
    -विभक्तिः f. a poten- tial termination; a termination which lays down an injunction; विधिविभक्तिं हि विधायिकां लिङं मन्यमानाः श्लोकमिमं समामनन्ति ŚB. on MS.4.3.3. The श्लोक referred to here is; कुर्यात् क्रियेत कर्तव्यं भवेत् स्यादिति पञ्चमम् । एतत् स्यात् सर्ववेदेषु नियतं विधिलक्षणम् ॥ This श्लोक speaks of the five forms which the विधिविभक्ति takes in the Vedic literature.
    -हीन a. devoid of rule, unauthorised, irregular.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > विधिः _vidhiḥ

  • 76 शास्त्रम् _śāstram

    शास्त्रम् [शिष्यते$नेन शास्-ष्ट्रन्]
    1 An order, a command, rule, precept; अतिक्रामति यः शास्त्रं पितुर्धर्मार्थदर्शिनः Mb.5.148. 21.
    -2 A sacred precept or rule, scriptural injunction; तस्माच्छास्त्रं प्रमाणं ते कार्याकार्यव्यवस्थितौ Bg.16.24.
    -3 A religious or sacred treatise, sacred book, scripture; see comps. below.
    -4 Any department of knowledege, science; इति गुह्यतमं शास्त्रम् Bg.15.2; शास्त्रेष्वकुण्ठिता बुद्धिः R.1.19; often at the end of comp. after the word denoting the subject, or applied collectively to the whole body of teaching on that subject; वेदान्तशास्त्र, न्यायशास्त्र, तर्कशास्त्र, अलंकार- शास्त्र &c.
    -5 What is learnt, knowledge; Śi.5.47.
    -6 A work, treatise; तन्त्रैः पञ्चभिरेतच्चकार सुमनोहरं शास्त्रकम् Pt.1.
    -7 Theory (opp. प्रयोग or practice); इमं मां च शास्त्रे प्रयोगे च विमृशतु M.1.
    -8 The material and spiritual science together; तत्त्वाभेदेन यच्छास्त्रं तत्कार्यं नान्यथाविधम् Mb. 12.267.9.
    -Comp. -अतिक्रमः -अननुष्ठानम् vio- lation of sacred precepts, disregard of religious autho- rity.
    -अनुष्ठानम्, -अनुसारः conformity to or obser- vance of sacred precepts.
    -अन्वित a. conformable to doctrine or rule.
    -अभिज्ञ a. versed in the Śāstras.
    -अर्थः 1 the meaning of the sacred precept.
    -2 a scrip- tural precept or statement.
    -आचरणम् 1 observance of sacred precepts.
    -2 the study of Śāstras.
    (-णः) 1 one versed in scriptures.
    -2 a student of Vedas.
    -आवर्तलिपिः a particular mode of writing.
    -उक्त a. pre- scribed by sacred laws, enjoined by the Śāstras, lawful, legal.
    -कारः, -कृत् m.
    1 the author of a Śāstra or sacred book.
    -2 an author in general.
    -3 a sage, saint.
    -कोविद a. versed in the Śāstras.
    -गण्डः a superficial reader of books, superficial scholar.
    -चक्षुस् n. grammar (as being the 'eye', as it were, with which to understand any Śāstra).
    -चारणः one who deserves sacred pre- cepts.
    -ज्ञ, -दर्शिन्, -विद् a.
    1 well-versed in the Śāstras.
    -2 a mere theorist.
    -ज्ञानम् knowledge of sacred books, conversancy with scriptures.
    -तत्त्वम् truth as taught in the Śāstras, scriptural truth. ˚ज्ञः an astronomer.
    -दृष्ट a. stated or enjoined in sacred books; तदहं प्रष्टुमिच्छामि शास्त्रदृष्टेन कर्मणा Rām.
    -दृष्टिः f. scriptural point of view. -m. an astrologer.
    -प्रसंगः 1 the subject of the Śāstras.
    -2 any discussion on scriptural points.
    -योनिः the source of the Śāstras.
    -वक्तृ an expounder of sacred books or knowledge.
    -वर्जित a. free from all rule or law.
    -वादः a precept or statement of the Śāstras.
    -विधानम्, -विधिः a sacred precept, scriptural injunc- tion.
    -विप्रतिषेधः, -विरोधः 1 mutual contradiction of sacred precepts, inconsistency of precepts.
    -2 any act contrary to sacred precepts.
    -विमुख a. averse from study; Pt.1.
    -विरुद्ध a. contrary to the Śāstras, illegal, unlawful.
    -व्युत्पत्तिः f. intimate knowledge of the sacred writings, proficiency in the Śāstras.
    -शिल्पिन् m. the country of Kāśmīra.
    -सिद्ध a. established by sacred authority.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > शास्त्रम् _śāstram

  • 77 सु _su

    1
    सु I. 1 U. (सुवति-ते) To go, move. -II. 1, 2 P. (सवति, सौति) To possess power or supremacy. -III. 5. U. (सुनोति, सुनुते; सुत; the स् of सु is changed to ष् after any preposition ending in इ or उ)
    1 To press out or extract juice.
    -2 To distil.
    -3 To pour out, sprinkle, make a libation.
    -4 To perform a sacrifice especially the Soma (sacrifice).
    -5 To bathe.
    -6 To churn. -Desid. (सुषूषति-ते) -- With उद् to excite, agitate. -प्र to produce, beget.
    2
    सु ind. A particle often used with nouns to form Karmadhāraya and Bahuvrīhī compounds, and with adjectives and adverbs. It has the following senses:--
    1 Well, good, excellent; as in सुगन्धि.
    -2 Beautiful, handsome; as in सुमध्यमा, सुकेशी &c.
    -3 Well, perfectly, thoroughly, properly; सुजीर्णमन्नं सुविचक्षणः सुतः सुशासिता स्त्री नृपतिः सुसेवितः......सुदीर्घकाले$पि न याति विक्रियाम् H.1.22.
    -4 Easily, readily, as in सुकर or सुलभ q. v.
    -5 Much, very much, exceedingly; सुदारुण, सुदीर्घ &c.
    -6 Worthy of respect or reverence.
    -7 It is also said to have the senses of assent, prosperity, and distress.
    -Comp. -अक्ष a.
    1 having good eyes.
    -2 having keen organs, acute.
    -अङ्ग a. well-shaped, handsome, lovely.
    -अच्छ a. see s. v.
    -अन्त a. having happy end, ending well.
    -अल्प, -अल्पक a. see s. v.
    -अस्ति, -अस्तिक see s. v.
    -आकार, -आकृति a. well-formed, handsome, beautiful.
    - आगत see s. v.
    -आदानम् taking justly or properly; स्वादानाद्वर्णसंसर्गात्त्वबलानां च रक्षणात् । बलं संजायते राज्ञः स प्रेत्येह च वर्धते ॥ Ms.8.172.
    -आभास a. very splendid or illustrious; सारतो न विरोधी नः स्वाभासो भरवानुत Ki.15. 22.
    -इष्ट a. properly sacrificed; स्विष्टं यजुर्भिः प्रणतो$स्मि यज्ञम् Bhāg.4.7.41. ˚कृत् m. a form of fire; धर्मादिभ्यो यथान्यायं मन्त्रैः स्विष्टकृतं बुधः Bhāg.11.27.41.
    -उक्त a. well-spoken, well-said; अथवा सूक्तं खलु केनापि Ve.3. (
    -क्ता) a kind of bird (सारिका).
    (-क्तम्) 1 a good or wise saying; नेतुं वाञ्छति यः खलान् पथि सतां सूक्तैः सुधा- स्यन्दिभिः Bh.2.6; R.15.97.
    -2 a Vedic hymn, as in पुरुषसूक्त &c. ˚दर्शिन् m. a hymn-seer, Vedic sage. ˚वाकन्यायः A rule of interpretation according to which some thing that is declared as being subordinate to some- thing else should be understood to signify a part or whole on the basis of expediency or utility. This is discussed by जैमिनि and शबर at MS.3.2.15-18. ˚वाच् f.
    1 a hymn.
    -2 praise, a word of praise.
    -उक्तिः f.
    1 a good or friendly speech.
    -2 a good or clever saying.
    -3 a correct sentence.
    -उत्तर a.
    1 very superior.
    -2 well towards the north.
    -उत्थान a. making good efforts, vigorous, active. (
    -नम्) vigorous effort or exertion.
    -उन्मद, -उन्माद a. quite mad or frantic.
    - उपसदन a. easy to be approached.
    -उपस्कर a. furnished with good instruments.
    -कण्टका the aloe plant.
    -कण्ठ a. sweet- voiced. (
    -ण्ठी) the female cuckoo.
    -कण्डुः itch.
    -कन्दः 1 an onion.
    -2 a yam.
    -3 a sort of grass.
    -कन्दकः onion.
    -कर a. (
    -रा or
    -री f.)
    1 easy to be done, practi- cable, feasible; वक्तुं सुकरं कर्तुं (अध्यवसातुं) दुष्करम् Ve.3 'sooner said than done'.
    -2 easy to be managed. (
    -रः) a good-natured horse. (
    -रा) a tractable cow. (
    -रम्) charity, benevolence.
    -कर्मन् a.
    1 one whose deeds are righteous, virtuous, good.
    -2 active, diligent. (-m.) N. of Visvakarman.
    -कल a. one who has acquired a great reputation for liberality in giving and using (money &c,)
    -कलिल a. well filled with.
    -कल्प a. very qualified or skilled; कालेन यैर्वा विमिताः सुकल्पैर्भूपांसवः खे मिहिका द्युभासः Bhāg.1.14.7.
    -कल्पित a. well equip- ped or armed.
    -कल्य a. perfectly sound.
    -काण्डः the Kāravella plant.
    -काण्डिका the Kāṇḍīra creeper.
    -काण्डिन् a.
    1 having beautiful stems.
    -2 beautifully joined. (-m.) a bee.
    -काष्ठम् fire-wood.
    -कुन्दकः an onion.
    -कुमार a.
    1 very delicate or soft, smooth.
    -2 beautifully young or youthful.
    (-रः) 1 a beautiful youth.
    -2 a kind of sugar-cane.
    -3 a kind of grain (श्यामाक).
    -4 a kind of mustard.
    -5 the wild Cham- paka.
    (-रा) 1 the double jasmine.
    -2 the plantain.
    -3 the great-flowered jasmine.
    -कुमारकः 1 a beauti- ful youth.
    -2 rice (शालि).
    (-कम्) 1 the Tamāla- patra.
    -2 a particutar part of the ear.
    -कुमारी the Navamallikā jasmine.
    -कृत् a.
    1 doing good, benevolent.
    -2 pious, virtuous, righteous.
    -3 wise, learned.
    -4 for- tunate, lucky.
    -5 making good sacrifices or offerings. (-m.)
    1 a skilful worker.
    -2 N. of Tvaṣṭri.
    -कृत a.
    1 done well or properly.
    -2 thoroughly done; कच्चिन्नु सुकृतान्येव कृतरूपाणि वा पुनः । विदुस्ते सर्वकार्याणि Rām.2.1.2.
    -3 well made or constructed.
    -4 treated with kindness, assisted, befriended.
    -5 virtuous, righteous, pious.
    -6 lucky, fortunate.
    (-तम्) 1 any good or virtuous act, kindness, favour, service; नादत्ते कस्यचित् पापं न चैव सुकृतं विभुः Bg.5.15; Me.17.
    -2 virtue, moral or religious merit; स्वर्गाभिसंधिसुकृतं वञ्चनामिव मेनिरे Ku.6.47; तच्चिन्त्यमानं सुकृतं तवेति R.14.16.
    -3 fortune, auspiciousness.
    -4 recompense, reward.
    -5 Penance; तदभूरिवासरकृतं सुकृतैरुप- लभ्य वैभवमनन्यभवम् Ki.6.29.
    -कृतिः f.
    1 well-doing, a good act.
    -2 kindness, virtue.
    -3 practice of penance.
    -4 auspiciousness.
    -कृतिन् a.
    1 acting well or kindly.
    -2 virtuous, pious, good, righteous; सन्तः सन्तु निरापदः सुकृतिनां कीर्तिश्चिरं वर्धताम् H.4.132; चतुर्विधा भजन्ते मां जनाः सुकृतिनो$र्जुन Bg.7.16.
    -3 wise, learned.
    -4 benevolent.
    -5 fortunate, lucky.
    -कृत्यम् a good action; सुकृत्यं विष्णु- गुप्तस्य मित्राप्तिर्भार्गवस्य च Pt.2.45.
    -केश(स)रः the citron tree.
    -क्रतुः 1 N. of Agni.
    -2 of Śiva.
    -3 of Indra.
    -4 of Mitra and Varuṇa.
    -5 of the sun.
    -6 of Soma.
    -क्रयः a fair bargain.
    -क्षेत्र a. sprung from a good womb.
    -खल्लिका luxurious life.
    -ग a.
    1 going gracefully or well.
    -2 graceful, elegant.
    -3 easy of access; अकृत्यं मन्यते कृत्यमगम्यं मन्यते सुगम् । अभक्ष्यं मन्यते भक्ष्यं स्त्रीवाक्यप्रेरितो नरः ॥ Pt.2.148.
    -4 intelligible, easy to be understood (opp. दुर्ग). (
    -गः) a Gandharva; गीतैः सुगा वाद्यधराश्च वाद्यकैः Bhāg.1.12.34.
    (-गम्) 1 ordure, feces.
    -2 happiness.
    -गण् m. a good calculator; L. D. B. -a. counting well.
    -गणकः a good calculator or astronomer.
    -गत a.
    1 well-gone or passed.
    -2 well-bestowed. (
    -तः) an epithet of Buddha.
    -गतिः 1 Welfare, hap- piness.
    -2 a secure refuge.
    -गन्धः 1 fragrance, odour, perfume.
    -2 sulphur.
    -3 a trader.
    (-न्धम्) 1 sandal.
    -2 small cumin seed.
    -3 a blue lotus.
    -4 a kind of fragrant grass. (
    -न्धा) sacred basil.
    -गन्धकः 1 sulphur.
    -2 the red Tulasee.
    -3 the orange.
    -4 a kind of gourd,
    -गन्धमूला a land-growing lotus-plant; L. D. B.
    -गन्धारः an epithet of Śiva.
    -गन्धि a.
    1 sweet-smelling, fra- grant, redolent with perfumes.
    -2 virtuous, pious.
    (-न्धिः) 1 perfume, fragrance.
    -2 the Supreme Being.
    -3 a kind of sweet-smelling mango. (
    -न्धि n.)
    1 the root of long pepper.
    -2 a kind of fragrant grass.
    -3 cori- ander seed. ˚त्रिफला
    1 nutmeg.
    -2 areca nut.
    -3 cloves. ˚मूलम् the root Uśīra. ˚मूषिका the musk-rat.
    -गन्धिकः 1 incense.
    -2 sulphur.
    -3 a kind of rice. (
    -कम्) the white lotus.
    -गम a.
    1 easy of access, accessible.
    -2 easy.
    -3 plain, intelligible.
    -गरम् cinnabar.
    -गहना an enclosure round a place of sacrifice to exclude profane access. ˚वृत्तिः f. the same as above.
    -गात्री a beautiful woman.
    -गृद्ध a. intensely longing for.
    -गृह a. (
    -ही f.) having a beautiful house or abode, well-lodged; सुगृही निर्गृहीकृता Pt.1.39.
    -गृहीत a.
    1 held well or firmly, grasped.
    -2 used or applied properly or auspiciously. ˚नामन् a.
    1 one whose name is auspiciously invoked, one whose name it is auspicious to utter (as Bali, Yudhi- ṣṭhira), a term used as a respectful mode of speaking; सुगृहीतनाम्नः भट्टगोपालस्य पौत्रः Māl.1.
    -ग्रासः a dainty mor- sel.
    -ग्रीव a. having a beautiful neck.
    (-वः) 1 a hero.
    -2 a swan.
    -3 a kind of weapon.
    -4 N. of one of the four horses of Kṛiṣṇa.
    -5 of Śiva.
    -6 of Indra.
    -7 N. of a monkey-chief and brother of Vāli. [By the advice of Kabandha, Rāma went to Sugrīva who told him how his brother had treated him and besought his assistance in recovering his wife, promising at the same time that he would assist Rāma in recovering his wife Sīta. Rāma, therfore, killed vāli, and installed Sugrīva on the throne. He then assisted Rāma with his hosts of monkeys in conquering Rāvaṇa, and recovering Sīta.] ˚ईशः N. of Rāma; सुग्रीवेशः कटी पातु Rāma-rakṣā.8.
    -ग्ल a. very weary or fatigued.
    -घोष a. having a pleasant sound. (
    -षः) N. of the conch of Nakula; नकुलः सहदेवश्च सुघोषमणपुष्पकौ Bg.1.16.
    -चक्षुस् a. having good eyes, seeing well. (-m.)
    1 discerning or wise man, learned man.
    -2 The glomerous fig-tree.
    -चरित, -चरित्र a.
    1 well-conducted, well-behaved; वृषभैकादशा गाश्च दद्यात् सुचरितव्रतः Ms.11.116.
    -2 moral, virtuous; तान् विदित्वा सुचरितैर्गूढैस्तत्कर्मकारिभिः Ms.9.261. (
    -तम्, -त्रम्) 1 good conduct, virtuous deeds.
    -2 merit; तव सुचरितमङ्गुलीय नूनं प्रतनु Ś.6.1. (
    -ता, -त्रा) a well-conducted, devoted, and virtuous wife.
    -चर्मन् m. the Bhūrja tree.
    -चित्रकः 1 a king fisher.
    -2 a kind of speckled snake.
    -चित्रा a kind of gourd.
    -चिन्ता, -चिन्तनम् deep thought, deep reflection or consideration.
    -चिरम् ind. for a very long time, very long.
    -चिरायुस् m. a god, deity.
    -चुटी a pair of nippers or tongs.
    -चेतस् a.
    1 well-minded.
    -2 wise.
    -चेतीकृत a. with the heart satiated; well- disposed; ततः सुचेतीकृतपौरभृत्यः Bk.3.2.
    -चेलकः a fine cloth.
    -च्छद a. having beautiful leaves.
    -छत्रः N. of Śiva. (
    -त्रा) the river Sutlej.
    -जन a.
    1 good, virtuous, respectable.
    -2 kind, benevolent.
    (-नः) 1 a good or virtuous man, benevolent man.
    -2 a gentleman.
    -3 N. of Indra's charioteer.
    -जनता 1 goodness, kind- ness, benevolence, virtue; ऐश्वर्यस्य विभूषणं सुजनता Bh.2. 82.
    -2 a number of good men.
    -3 bravery.
    -जन्मन् a.
    1 of noble or respectable birth; या कौमुदी नयनयोर्भवतः सुजन्मा Māl.1.34.
    -2 legitimate, lawfully born.
    -जलम् a lotus.
    -जल्पः 1 a good speech.
    -2 a kind of speech thus described by Ujjvalamaṇi; यत्रार्जवात् सगाम्भीर्यं सदैन्यं सहचापलम् । सोत्कण्ठं च हरिः स्पृष्टः स सुजल्पो निगद्यते ॥
    -जात a.
    1 well-grown, tall.
    -2 well made or produced.
    -3 of high birth.
    -4 beautiful, lovely; सुजातं कल्याणी भवतु कृत- कृत्यः स च युवा Māl.1.16; R.3.8.
    -5 very delicate; खिद्यत् सुजाताङ्घ्रितलामुन्निन्ये प्रेयसीं प्रियः Bhāg.1.3.31.
    -डीनकम् a kind of flight of birds; Mb.8.41.27 (com. पश्चाद् गतिः पराडीनं स्वर्गगं सुडीनकम्).
    -तनु a.
    1 having a beautiful body.
    -2 extremely delicate or slender, very thin.
    -3 emaciated. (
    -नुः, -नूः f.) a lovely lady; एताः सुतनु मुखं ते सख्यः पश्यन्ति हेमकूटगताः V.1.1; Ś.7.24.
    -तन्त्री a.
    1 well-stringed.
    -2 (hence) melodious.
    -तपस् a.
    1 one who practises austere penance; a वानप्रस्थ; स्विष्टिः स्वधीतिः सुतपा लोकाञ्जयति यावतः Mb.12.71.3.
    -2 having great heat. (-m.)
    1 an ascetic, a devotee, hermit, an anchorite.
    -2 the sun. (-n.) an austere penance.
    -तप्त a.
    1 greatly harassed, afflicted.
    -2 very severe (as a penance); तपसैव सुतप्तेन मुच्यन्ते किल्बिषात्ततः Ms.11.239.
    -तमाम् ind. most excellently, best.
    -तराम् ind.
    1 bet- ter, more excellently.
    -2 exceedingly, very, very much, excessively; तया दुहित्रा सुतरां सवित्री स्फुरत्प्रभामण्डलया चकाशे Ku.1.24; सुतरां दयालुः R.2.53;7.21;14.9;18.24.
    -3 more so, much more so; मय्यप्यास्था न ते चेत्त्वयि मम सुतरा- मेष राजन् गतो$ स्मि Bh.3.3.
    -4 consequently.
    -तर्दनः the (Indian) cuckco.
    -तर्मन् a. good for crossing over; सुतर्माणमधिनावं रुहेम Ait. Br.1.13; (cf. also यज्ञो वै सुतर्मा).
    -तलम् 1 'immense depth', N. of one of the seven regi- ons below the earth; see पाताल; (याहि) सुतलं स्वर्गीभिः प्रार्थ्यं ज्ञातिभिः परिवारितः Bhāg.8.22.33.
    -2 the foundation of a large building.
    -तान a. melodious.
    -तार a.
    1 very bright.
    -2 very loud; सुतारैः फूत्कारैः शिव शिव शिवेति प्रतनुमः Bh.3.2.
    -3 having a beautiful pupil (as an eye). (
    -रः) a kind of perfume. (
    -रा) (in Sāṁkhya) one of the nine kinds of acquiescence.
    -तिक्तकः the coral tree.
    -तीक्ष्ण a.
    1 very sharp.
    -2 very pungent.
    -3 acutely painful.
    (-क्ष्णः) 1 the Śigru tree.
    -2 N. of a sage; नाम्ना सुतीक्ष्णश्चरितेन दान्तः R.13.41. ˚दशनः an epithet of Śiva.
    -तीर्थः 1 a good preceptor.
    -2 N. of Śiva. -a. easily crossed or traversed.
    -तुङ्ग a. very lofty or tall.
    (-ङ्गः) 1 the cocoa-nut tree.
    -2 the culminating point of a planet.
    -तुमुल a. very loud.
    -तेजन a. well-pointed, sharpened. (
    -नः) a well-pointed arrow.
    -तेजस् a.
    1 very sharp.
    -2 very bright, or splendid.
    -3 very mighty. (-m.) a worshipper of the sun.
    -दक्षिण a.
    1 very sincere or upright.
    -2 liberal or rich in sacrificial gifts; यज्ञैर्भूरिसुदक्षिणैः सुविहितैः संप्राप्यते यत् फलम् Pt.1. 31.
    -3 very skilful.
    -4 very polite. (
    -णा) N. of the wife of Dilīpa; तस्य दाक्षिण्यरूढेन नाम्ना मगधवंशजा पत्नी सुदक्षिणेत्यासीत् R.1.31;3.1.
    -दण्डः a cane, ratan.
    -दत् a. (
    -ती f.) having handsome teeth; जगाद भूयः सुदतीं सुनन्दा R.6.37.
    -दन्तः 1 a good tooth.
    -2 an actor; a dancer. (
    -न्ती) the female elephant of the north-west quarter.
    -दर्श a. lovely, gracious looking; सुदर्शः स्थूललक्षयश्च न भ्रश्येत सदा श्रियः Mb.12.56.19 (com. सुदर्शः प्रसन्नवक्त्रः).
    -दर्शन a. (
    -ना or
    -नी f.)
    1 good-looking, beautiful, handsome.
    -2 easily seen. (
    -नः) the discus of Viṣṇu; as in कृष्णो$प्यसु- दर्शनः K.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -3 of mount Meru.
    -4 a vul- ture. (
    -नी, -नम्) N. of Amarāvatī, Indra's capital. (
    -नम्) N. of Jambudvīpa.
    -दर्शना 1 a handsome wo- man.
    -2 a woman.
    -3 an order, a command.
    -4 a kind of drug.
    -दास् a. very bountiful.
    -दान्तः a Buddhist.
    -दामन् a. one who gives liberally. (-m.)
    1 a cloud.
    -2 a moun- tain.
    -3 the sea.
    -4 N. of Indra's elephant.
    -5 N. of a very poor Brāhmaṇa who came to Dvārakā with only a small quantity of parched rice as a present to his friend Kṛiṣṇa, and was raised by him to wealth and glory.
    -दायः 1 a good or auspicious gift.
    -2 a special gift given on particular solemn occasions.
    -3 one who offers such a gift.
    -दिनम् 1 a happy or auspicious day.
    -2 a fine day or weather (opp दुर्दिनम्); so सुदिनाहम् in the same sense.
    -दिह् a. well-polished, bright.
    -दीर्घ a. very long or extended. (
    -र्घा) a kind of cucumber.
    -दुराधर्ष a.
    1 very hard to get.
    -2 quite intolerable.
    -दुरावर्त a. a very hard to be convinced.
    -दुरासद a. unapproachable.
    -दुर्जर a. very difficult to be digested.
    -दुर्मनस् a. very troubled in mind.
    -दुर्मर्ष a. quite in- tolerable.
    -दुर्लभ a. very scarce or rare.
    -दुश्चर a.
    1 inaccessible.
    -2 very painful.
    -दुश्चिकित्स a. very difficult to be cured.
    -दुष्प्रभः a chameleon.
    -दूर a. very distant or remote. (
    -सुदूरम् means
    1 to a great distance.
    -2 to a very high degree, very much; सुदूरं पीडयेत् कामः शरद्गुणनिरन्तरः Rām.4.3.12.
    -सुदूरात् 'from afar, from a distance').
    -दृढ a. very firm or hard, compact.
    -दृश् a. having beautiful eyes. (-f.) a pretty woman.
    -देशिकः a good guide.
    -धन्वन् a. having an excellent bow. (-m.)
    1 a good archer or bowman.
    -2 Ananta, the great serpent.
    -3 N. of Viśvakarman. ˚आचार्यः a mixed caste; वैश्यात्तु जायते व्रात्यात् सुधन्वाचार्य एव च Ms.1.23.
    -धर्मन् a. attentive to duties. (-f.) the council or assembly of gods. (-m.)
    1 the hall or palace of Indra.
    -2 one diligent in properly maintaining his family.
    -धर्मा, -र्मी 1 the council or assembly of gods (देवसभा); ययावुदीरितालोकः सुधर्मानवमां सभाम् R.17.27.
    -2 (सुधर्मा) N. of Dvārakā; दिवि भुव्यन्तरिक्षे च महोत्पातान् समु- त्थितान् । दृष्ट्वासीनान् सुधर्मायां कृष्णः प्राह यदूनिदम् ॥ Bhāg.11.3. 4;1.14.34.
    -धात a. well cleaned.
    -धार a. well-pointed (as an arrow).
    -धित a. Ved.
    1 perfect, secure.
    -2 kind, good.
    -3 happy, prosperous.
    -4 well-aimed or directed (as a weapon).
    -धी a. having a good understanding, wise, clever, intelligent. (
    -धीः) a wise or intelligent man, learned man or pandit. (-f.) a good under- standing, good sense, intelligence. ˚उपास्यः
    1 a particu- lar kind of royal palace.
    -2 N. of an attendant on Kṛiṣṇa. (
    -स्यम्) the club of Balarāma. ˚उपास्या
    1 a woman.
    -2 N. of Umā, or of one of her female com- panions.
    -3 a sort of pigment.
    -ध्रूम्रवर्णा one of the seven tongues of fire.
    -नन्दम् N. of Balarāma's club; प्रतिजग्राह बलवान् सुनन्देनाहनच्च तम् Bhāg.1.67.18.
    -नन्दः a kind of royal palace.
    -नन्दा 1 N. of a woman.
    -2 N. of Pārvatī; L. D. B.
    -3 yellow pigment; L. D. B.
    -नयः 1 good conduct.
    -2 good policy.
    - नयन a. having beau- tiful eyes. (
    -नः) a deer.
    (-ना) 1 a woman having beautiful eyes.
    -2 a woman in general.
    -नाभ a.
    1 having a beautiful navel.
    -2 having a good nave or cen- tre.
    (-भः) 1 a mountain.
    -2 the Maināka mountain, q. v. (
    -भम्) a wheel, discus (सुदर्शन); ये संयुगे$चक्षत तार्क्ष्यपुत्रमंसे सुनाभायुधमापतन्तम् Bhāg.3.2.24.
    -नालम् a red water-lily.
    -निःष्ठित a. quite ready.
    -निर्भृत a. very lonely or private. (
    -तम्) ind. very secretly or closely, very narrowly, privately.
    -निरूढ a. well-purged by an injection; Charaka.
    -निरूहणम् a good purgative.
    -निर्णिक्त a. well polished.
    -निश्चलः an epithet of Śiva.
    -निषण्णः (-कः) the herb Marsilea Quadrifolia (Mar. कुऱडू).
    -निहित a. well-established.
    -नीत a.
    1 well-con- ducted, well-behaved.
    -2 polite, civil.
    (-तनि) 1 good conduct or behaviour.
    -2 good policy or prodence.
    -नीतिः f.
    1 good conduct, good manners, propriety.
    -2 good policy.
    -3 N. of the mother of Dhruva, q. v.
    -नीथ a. well-disposed, well conducted, righteous, vir- tuous, good.
    (-थः) 1 a Brāhmaṇa.
    -2 N. of Śiśupāla, q. v.; तस्मिन्नभ्यर्चिते कृष्णे सुनीथः शत्रुकर्षणः Mb.1.39.11.
    -3 Ved. a good leader.
    -नील a. very black or blue. (
    -लः) the pomegranate tree. (
    -ला) common flax.
    (-लम्), -नीलकः a blue gem.
    -नु n. water.
    -नेत्र a. having good or beautiful eyes.
    -पक्व a.
    1 well-cooked.
    -2 thoroughly matured or ripe. (
    -क्वः) a sort of fra- grant mango.
    -पठ a. legible.
    -पत्नी a woman having a good husband.
    -पत्र a.
    1 having beautiful wings.
    -2 well-feathered (an arrow).
    -पथः 1 a good road.
    -2 a good course.
    -3 good conduct.
    -पथिन् m. (nom. sing. सुपन्थाः) a good road.
    -पद्मा orris root.
    -परीक्षित a. well-examined.
    -पर्ण a. (
    -र्णा or
    -र्णी f.)
    1 well-winged; तं भूतनिलयं देवं सुपर्णमुपधावत Bhāg.8.1.11.
    -2 having good or beautiful leaves.
    (-र्णः) 1 a ray of the sun.
    -2 a class of bird-like beings of a semi-divine charac- ter.
    -3 any supernatural bird.
    -4 an epithet of Garuḍa; ततः सुपर्णव्रजपक्षजन्मा नानागतिर्मण्डलयन् जवेन Ki.16.44.
    -5 a cock.
    -6 the knowing (ज्ञानरूप); देहस्त्वचित्पुरुषो$यं सुपर्णः क्रुध्येत कस्मै नहि कर्ममूलम् Bhāg.11.23.55.
    -7 Any bird; द्वा सुपर्णा सयुजा सखाया समानं वृक्षं परिषस्वजाते Muṇd. 3.1.1. ˚केतुः N. of Viṣṇu; तमकुण्ठमुखाः सुपर्णकेतोरिषवः क्षिप्तमिषुव्रजं परेण Śi.2.23.
    -पर्णकः = सुपर्ण.
    -पर्णा, -पर्णी f.
    1 a number of lotuses.
    -2 a pool abounding in lotuses.
    -3 N. of the mother of Garuḍa.
    -पर्यवदात a. very clean.
    -पर्याप्त a.
    1 very spacious; तस्य मध्ये सुपर्याप्तं कारयेद् गृहमात्मनः Ms.7.76.
    -2 well-fitted.
    -पर्वन् a. well- jointed, having many joints or knots. (-m.)
    1 a bam- boo.
    -2 an arrow.
    -3 a god, deity; विहाय या सर्वसुपर्व- नायकम् N.4.9;14.41,76.
    -4 a special lunar day (as the day of full or new moon, and the 8th and 14th day of each fortnight).
    -5 smoke. (-f.) white Dūrvā grass.
    -पलायित a.
    1 completely fled or run away.
    -2 skilfully retreated.
    -पाक्यम् a kind of medicinal salt (Mar. बिडलोण).
    -पात्रम् 1 a good or suitable vessel, worthy receptacle.
    -2 a fit or competent person, any one well-fitted for an office, an able person.
    -पाद् (
    -पाद् or
    -पदी f.) having good or handsome feet.
    -पार्श्वः 1 the waved-leaf fig-tree (प्लक्ष).
    -2 N. of the son of Sampāti, elder brother of Jaṭāyu.
    -पालि a. distinguished.
    -पीतम् 1 a carrot.
    -2 yellow sandal. (
    -तः) the fifth Muhūrta.
    -पुंसी a woman having a good husband.
    -पुरम् a strong fortress.
    -पुष्प a. (
    -ष्पा or
    -ष्पी f.) having beautiful flowers.
    (-ष्पः) 1 the coral tree.
    -2 the Śirīṣa tree. (
    -ष्पी) the plantain tree.
    (-ष्पम्) 1 cloves.
    -2 the menstrual excretion.
    -पुष्पित a.
    1 well blossomed, being in full flower.
    -2 having the hair thrilling or bristling.
    -पूर a.
    1 easy to be filled; सुपूरा स्यात् कुनदिका सुपूरो मूषिकाञ्जलिः Pt.1.25.
    -2 well-filling. (
    -रः) a kind of citron (बीजपूर).
    -पूरकः the Baka-puṣpa tree.
    -पेशस् a. beautiful, tender; रत्नानां पद्मरागो$स्मि पद्मकोशः सुपेशसाम् Bhāg.11.16.3. ˚कृत् m. a kind of fly; Bhāg.11.7.34.
    -प्रकाश a.
    1 manifest, apparent; ज्येष्ठे मासि नयेत् सीमां सुप्रकाशेषु सेतुषु Ms.8.245.
    -2 public, notorious.
    -प्रतर्कः a sound judgment.
    -प्रतिभा spirituous liquor.
    -प्रतिष्ठ a.
    1 standing well.
    -2 very celebrated, renowned, glorious, famous.
    (-ष्ठा) 1 good position.
    -2 good reputation, fame, celebrity.
    -3 esta- blishment, erection.
    -4 installation, consecration.
    -प्रतिष्ठित a.
    1 well-established.
    -2 consecrated.
    -3 ce- lebrated. (
    -तः) the Udumbara tree.
    -प्रतिष्णात a.
    1 thoroughly purified.
    -2 well-versed in.
    -3 well-investi- gated, clearly ascertained or determined.
    -प्रतीक a.
    1 having a beautiful shape, lovely, handsome; भगवान् भागवतवात्सल्यतया सुप्रतीकः Bhāg.5.3.2.
    -2 having a beau- tiful trunk.
    (-कः) 1 an epithet of Kāmadeva.
    -2 of Śiva.
    -3 of the elephant of the north-east quarter.
    -4 An honest man; स्तेयोपायैर्विरचितकृतिः सुप्रतीको यथास्ते Bhāg.1.8.31.
    -प्रपाणम् a good tank.
    -प्रभ a. very brilliant, glorious. (
    -भा) one of the seven tongues of fire.
    -प्रभातम् 1 an auspicious dawn or day-break; दिष्टथा सुप्रभातमद्य यदयं देवो दृष्टः U.6.
    -2 the earliest dawn.
    -प्रभावः omnipotence.
    -प्रमाण a. large-sized.
    -प्रयुक्तशरः a skilful archer.
    -प्रयोगः 1 good management or ap- plication.
    -2 close contact.
    -3 dexterity.
    -प्रलापः good speech, eloquence.
    -प्रसन्नः N. of Kubera.
    -प्रसाद a. very gracious or propitious. (
    -दः) N. of Śiva.
    -प्रातम् a fine morning.
    -प्रिय a. very much liked, agreeable. (
    -यः) (in prosody) a foot of two short syllables.
    (-या) 1 a charming woman.
    -2 a beloved mistress.
    -प्रौढा a marriageable girl.
    -फल a.
    1 very fruitful, very productive.
    -2 very fertile.
    (-लः) 1 the pomegranate tree.
    -2 the jujube.
    -3 the Karṇikāra tree.
    -4 a kind of bean.
    (-ला) 1 a pumpkin, gourd.
    -2 the plan- tain tree.
    -3 a variety of brown grape.
    -4 colocynth.
    -फेनः a cuttle-fish bone.
    -बन्धः sesamum.
    -बभ्रु a. dark-brown.
    -बल a. very powerful.
    (-लः) 1 N. of Śiva.
    -2 N. of the father of Śakuni.
    -बान्धवः N. of Śiva.
    -बाल a. very childish.
    -बाहु a.
    1 handsome- armed.
    -2 strong-armed. (
    -हुः) N. of a demon, brother of Mārīcha, who had become a demon by the curse of Agastya. He with Mārīcha began to disturb the sacrifice of Viśvāmitra, but was defeated by Rāma. and Lakṣmaṇa; यः सुबाहुरिति राक्षसो$परस्तत्र तत्र विससर्प मायया R.11.29.
    -बीजम् good seed; सुबीजं चैव सुक्षेत्रे जातं संपद्यते तथा Ms.1.69.
    (-जः) 1 N. of Śiva.
    -2 the poppy.
    -बोध a.
    1 easily apprehended or understood. (
    -धः) good information or advice.
    -ब्रह्मण्यः 1 an epithet of Kārtikeya.
    -2 N. of one of the sixteen priests employed at a sacrifice.
    -भग a.
    1 very fortu- nate or prosperous, happy, blessed, highly favoured.
    -2 lovely, charming, beautiful, pretty; न तु ग्रीष्मस्यैवं सुभगमपराद्धं युवतिषु Ś.3.9; Ku.4.34; R.11.8; Māl.9.
    -3 pleasant, grateful, agreeable, sweet; दिवसाः सुभगा- दित्याश्छायासलिलदुर्भगाः Rām.3.16.1; श्रवणसुभग M.3.4; Ś.1.3.
    -4 beloved, liked, amiable, dear; सुमुखि सुभगः पश्यन् स त्वामुपैतु कृतार्थताम् Gīt.5.
    -5 illustrious.
    (-गः) 1 borax.
    -2 the Aśoka tree.
    -3 the Champaka tree.
    -4 red amarnath. (
    -गम्) good fortune. ˚मानिन्, सुभगं- मन्य a.
    1 considering oneself fortunate, amiable, pleasing; वाचालं मां न खलु सुभगंमन्यभावः करोति Me.96.
    -2 vain, flattering oneself.
    -भगा 1 a woman beloved by her hus- band, a favourite wife.
    -2 an honoured mother.
    -3 a kind of wild jasmine.
    -4 turmeric.
    -5 the Priyaṅgu creeper.
    -6 the holy basil.
    -7 a woman having her husband alive (सौभाग्यवती); जयशब्दैर्द्विजाग्र्याणां सुभगानर्तितै- स्तथा Mb.7.7.9.
    -8 a five-year old girl representing Durgā at festivals.
    -9 musk. ˚सुत the son of a favou- rite wife.
    -भङ्गः the cocoa-nut tree.
    -भटः a great war- rior, champion, soldier.
    -भट्टः a learned man.
    -भद्र a. very happy or fortunate. (
    -द्रः) N. of Viṣṇu; साकं साकम्पमंसे वसति विदधती बासुभद्रं सुभद्रम् Viṣṇupāda S.31. (
    -द्रा) N. of the sister of Balarāma and Kṛiṣṇa, married to Arjuna q. v. She bore to him a son named Abhimanyu.
    -भद्रकः 1 a car for carrying the image of a god.
    -2 the Bilva tree.
    -भाषित a.
    1 spoken well or eloquent.
    (-तम्) 1 fine speech, eloquence, learning; जीर्णमङ्गे सुभाषितम् Bh.3.2.
    -2ल a witty saying, an apophthegm, an apposite saying; सुभाषितेन गीतेन युवतीनां च लीलया । मनो न भिद्यते यस्य स वै मुक्तो$थवा पशुः Subhāṣ.
    -3 a good remark; बालादपि सुभाषितम् (ग्राह्यम्).
    -भिक्षम् 1 good alms, successful begging.
    -2 abundance of food, an abundant supply of provisions, plenty of corn &c.
    -भीरकः the Palāśa tree.
    -भीरुकम् silver.
    -भूतिः 1 well-being, wel- fare.
    -2 the Tittira bird; Gīrvāṇa.
    -भूतिकः the Bilva tree.
    -भूषणम् a type of pavilion where a ceremony is performed on a wife's perceiving the first signs of con- ception; सुभूषणाख्यं विप्राणां योग्यं पुंसवनार्थकम् Māna.34.354.
    -भृत a.
    1 well-paid.
    -2 heavily laden.
    -भ्रू a. having beautiful eyebrows. (
    -भ्रूः f.) a lovely woman. (N. B. The vocative singular of this word is strictly सुभ्रूः; but सुभ्रु is used by writers like Bhaṭṭi. Kālidāsa, and Bhavabhūti; हा पितः क्वासि हे सुभ्रु Bk.6.17; so V.3.22; Ku.5.43; Māl.3.8.)
    -मङ्गल a.
    1 very auspicious.
    -2 abounding in sacrifices.
    -मति a. very wise. (
    -तिः f.)
    1 a good mind or disposition, kindness, benevolence, friendship.
    -2 a favour of the gods.
    -3 a gift, blessing.
    -4 a prayer, hymn.
    -5 a wish or desire.
    -6 N. of the wife of Sagara and mother of 6, sons.
    -मदनः the mango tree.
    -मदात्मजा a celestial damsel.
    -मधुरम् a very sweet or gentle speech, agreeable words.
    -मध्य, -मध्यम a. slender-waisted.
    -मध्या, -मध्यमा a graceful woman.
    -मन a. very charming, lovely, beautiful.
    (-नः) 1 wheat.
    -2 the thorn-apple. (
    -ना) the great-flowered jasmine.
    -मनस् a.
    1 good-minded, of a good disposition, benevolent; शान्तसंकल्पः सुमना यथा स्याद्वीतमन्युर्गौतमो माभिमृत्यो Kaṭh.1.1.
    -2 well-pleased, satisfied; (hence
    -सुमनीभू = to be at ease; जिते नृपारौ समनीभवन्ति शद्बायमानान्यशनैरशङ्कम् Bk.2.54.). (-m.)
    1 a god, divinity.
    -2 a learned man.
    -3 a student of the Vedas.
    -4 wheat.
    -5 the Nimba tree. (-f., n.; said to be pl. only by some) a flower; मुमुचुर्मुनयो देवाः सुमनांसि मुदान्विताः Bhāg.1.3.7; रमणीय एष वः सुमनसां संनिवेशः Māl.1. (where the adjectival; sense in 1 is also intended); किं सेव्यते सुमनसां मनसापि गन्धः कस्तू- रिकाजननशक्तिभृता मृगेण R.G; Śi.6.66. ˚वर्णकम् flowers, unguent or perfume etc. for the body; सा तदाप्रभृति सुमनो- वर्णकं नेच्छति Avimārakam 2. (-f.)
    1 the great-flowered jasmine.
    -2 the Mālatī creeper. ˚फलः the woodapple. ˚फलम् nutmeg.
    -मनस्क a. cheerful, happy.
    -मन्तु a.
    1 advising well.
    -2 very faulty or blameable. (-m.) a good adviser.
    -मन्त्रः N. of the charioteer of Daśāratha.
    -मन्दभाज् a. very unfortunate.
    -मर्दित a. much harassed.
    -मर्षण a. easy to be borne.
    -मित्रा 1 N. of one of the wives of Daśāratha and mother of Lakṣmaṇa and Śatrughna.
    -मुख a. (
    -खा or
    -खी f.)
    1 having a beautiful face, lovely.
    -2 pleasing.
    -3 disposed to, eager for; सुरसद्मयानसुमुखी जनता Ki.6.42.
    -4 favour- able, kind.
    -5 well-pointed (as an arrow).
    -6 (सुमुखा) having a good entrance.
    (-खः) 1 a learned man.
    -2 an epithet of Garuḍa.
    -3 of Gaṇeśa; सुमुखश्चैकदन्तश्च कपिलो गजकर्णकः Maṅgal. S.1.
    -4 of Śiva.
    (-खम्) 1 the scratch of a finger-nail.
    -2 a kind of building.
    (-खा, -खी) 1 a handsome woman.
    -2 a mirror.
    -मूलकम् a carrot.
    -मृत a. stone-dead.
    -मेखलः the Muñja grass.
    -मेधस a. having a good understanding, wise, intelligent; इमे अङ्गिरसः सत्रमासते$द्य सुमेधसः Bhāg.9.4.3. (-m.) a wise man. (-f.) heart-pea.
    -मेरुः 1 the sac- red mountain Meru, q. v.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -यन्त्रित a.
    1 well-governed.
    -2 self-controlled.
    -यमाः a parti- cular class of gods; जातो रुचेरजनयत् सुयमान् सुयज्ञ आकूति- सूनुरमरानथ दक्षिणायाम् Bhāg.2.7.2.
    -यवसम् beautiful grass, good pasturage.
    -यामुनः 1 a palace.
    -2 N. of Viṣṇu.
    -युक्तः N. of Śiva.
    -योगः 1 a favourable junc- ture.
    -2 good opportunity.
    -योधनः an epithet of Duryodhana q. v.
    -रक्त a.
    1 well coloured.
    -2 im- passioned.
    -3 very lovely.
    -4 sweet-voiced; सुरक्तगोपी- जनगीतनिःस्वने Ki.4.33.
    -रक्तकः 1 a kind of red chalk.
    -2 a kind of mango tree.
    -रङ्गः 1 good colour.
    -2 the orange.
    -3 a hole cut in a house (सुरङ्गा also in this sense).
    (-ङ्गम्) 1 red sanders.
    -2 vermilion. ˚धातुः red chalk. ˚युज् m. a house-breaker.
    -रङ्गिका the Mūrvā plant.
    -रजःफलः the jack-fruit tree.
    -रञ्जनः the betel nut tree.
    -रत a.
    1 much sported.
    -2 playful.
    -3 much enjoyed.
    -4 compassionate, tender.
    (-तम्) 1 great delight or enjoyment.
    -2 copulation, sexual union or intercourse, coition; सुरतमृदिता बालवनिता Bh.2. 44. ˚गुरुः the husband; पर्यच्छे सरसि हृतें$शुके पयोभिर्लोलाक्षे सुरतगुरावपत्रपिष्णोः Śi.8.46. ˚ताण्डवम् vigorous sexual movements; अद्यापि तां सुरतताण्डवसूत्रधारीं (स्मरामि) Bil. Ch. Uttara.28. ˚ताली
    1 a female messenger, a go-between.
    -2 a chaplet, garland for the head. ˚प्रसंगः addiction to amorous pleasures; कालक्रमेणाथ योः प्रवृत्ते स्वरूपयोग्ये सुरत- प्रसंगे Ku.1.19.
    -रतिः f. great enjoyment or satis- faction.
    -रस a. well-flavoured, juicy, savoury.
    -2 sweet.
    -3 elegant (as a composition). (
    -सः, -सा) the plant सिन्धुवार. (
    -सा) N. of Durgā. (
    -सा, -सम्) the sacred basil.
    (-सम्) 1 gum-myrrh.
    -2 fragrant grass.
    -राजन् a. governed by a good king; सुराज्ञि देशे राजन्वान् Ak. (-m.)
    1 a good king.
    -2 a divinity.
    -राजिका a small house-lizard.
    -राष्ट्रम् N. of a country on the western side of India (Surat). ˚जम् a kind of poison.
    -2 a sort of black bean (Mar. तूर). ˚ब्रह्मः a Brāhmaṇa of Surāṣṭra.
    -रूप a.
    1 well-formed, handsome, love- ly; सुरूपा कन्या.
    -2 wise, learned. (
    -पः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -रूहकः a horse resembling an ass.
    -रेतस् n. mental power (चिच्छक्ति); सुरेतसादः पुनराविश्य चष्टे Bhāg. 5.7.14.
    -रेभ a. fine-voiced; स्यन्दना नो चतुरगाः सुपेभा वाविपत्तयः । स्यन्दना नो च तुरगाः सुरेभा वा विपत्तयः ॥ Ki.15.16. (
    -भम्) tin.
    -लक्षण a.
    1 having auspicious or beautiful marks.
    -2 fortunate.
    (-णम्) 1 observing, examining carefully, determining, ascertaining.
    -2 a good or auspicious mark.
    -लक्षित a. well determined or ascertained; तुलामानं प्रतीमानं सर्वं च स्यात् सुलक्षितम् Ms.8.43.
    -लग्नः, -ग्नम् an auspicious moment.
    -लभ a.
    1 easy to be obtained, easy of attainment, attainable, feasible; न सुलभा सकलेन्दुमुखी च सा V.2.9; इदमसुलभवस्तुप्रार्थनादुर्नि- वारम् 2.6.
    -2 ready for, adapted to, fit, suitable; निष्ठ्यूतश्चरणोपभोगसुलभो लाक्षारसः केनचित् Ś.4.4.
    -3 natural to, proper for; मानुषतासुलभो लघिमा K. ˚कोप a. easily provoked, irascible.
    -लिखित a. well registered.
    -लुलित a.
    1 moving playfully.
    -2 greatly hurt, injured.
    -लोचन a. fine-eyed. (
    -नः) a deer.
    (-ना) 1 a beauti- ful woman.
    -2 N. of the wife of Indrajit.
    -लोहकम् brass.
    -लोहित a. very red. (
    -ता) one of the seven tongues of fire.
    -वक्त्रम् 1 a good face or mouth.
    -2 correct utterance. (
    -क्त्रः) N. of Śiva.
    -वचनम्, -वचस् n. eloquence. -a. eloquent.
    -वयस् f. a hermaphrodite.
    -वर्चकः, -वर्चिकः, -का, -वर्चिन् m. natron, alkali.
    -वर्चला 1 N. of the wife of the sun; तं चाहमनुवर्तिष्ये यथा सूर्यं सुवर्चला Rām.2.3.3.
    -2 linseed.
    -वर्चसः N. of Śiva.
    -वर्चस्क a. splendid, brilliant.
    -वर्ण see s. v.
    -वर्तित 1 well rounded.
    -2 well arranged.
    -वर्तुलः a water-melon.
    -वसन्तः 1 an agreeable vernal season.
    -2 the day of full moon in the month of Chaitra, or a festival celebrated in honour of Kāmadeva in that month (also सुवसन्तकः in this sense).
    -वह a.
    1 bearing well, patient.
    -2 patient, enduring.
    -3 easy to be borne-
    (-हा) 1 a lute.
    -2 N. of several plants like रास्ना, निर्गुण्डी &c.; Mātaṅga L.1.1.
    -वासः 1 N. of Śiva.
    -2 a pleasant dwelling.
    -3 an agreeable perfume or odo- ur.
    -वासकः a water-melon.
    -वासरा cress.
    -वासिनी 1 a woman married or single who resides in her father's house.
    -2 a married woman whose husband is alive.
    -विक्रान्त a. very valiant or bold, chivalrous; सुविक्रान्तस्य नृपतेः सर्वमेव महीतलम् Śiva. B.16.45. (
    -न्तः) a hero. (
    -न्तम्) heroism.
    -विग्रह a. having a beautiful figure.
    -विचक्षण a. very clever, wise.
    -विद् m. a learned man, shrewd person. (-f.) a shrewd or clever woman.
    -विदः 1 an attendant on the women's apartments.
    -2 a king.
    -विदग्ध a. very cunning, astute.
    -विदत् m. a king
    -विदत्रम् 1 a household, family.
    -2 wealth.
    -3 grace, favour.
    -विदल्लः an attendant on the women's apart- ments (wrongly for सौविदल्ल q. v.). (
    -ल्लम्) the wo- men's apartments, harem.
    -विदल्ला a married woman.
    -विध a. of a good kind.
    -विधम् ind. easily.
    -विधिः a good rule, ordinance.
    -विनीत a.
    1 well trained, modest.
    -2 well executed. (
    -ता) a tractable cow.
    -विनेय a. easy to be trained or educated.
    -विभक्त a. well pro- portioned, symmetrical.
    -विरूढ a.
    1 fully grown up or developed.
    -2 well ridden.
    -विविक्त a.
    1 solitary (as a wood).
    -2 well decided (as a question).
    -विहित a.
    1 well-placed, well-deposited.
    -2 well-furnished, well- supplied, well-provided, well-arranged; सुविहितप्रयोगतया आर्यस्य न किमपि परिहास्यते Ś.1; कलहंसमकरन्दप्रेवशावसरे तत् सुविहितम् Māl.1.
    -3 well done or performed.
    -4 well satisfied (by hospitality); अन्नपानैः सुविहितास्तस्मिन् यज्ञे महात्मनः Rām.1.14.16.
    -वी(बी)ज a. having good seed.
    (-जः) 1 N. of Śiva.
    -2 the poppy. (
    -जम्) good seed.
    -वीरकम् 1 a kind of collyrium.
    -2 sour gruel (काञ्जिक); सुवीरकं याच्यमाना मद्रिका कर्षति स्फिचौ Mb.8.4.38.
    -वीराम्लम् sour rice-gruel.
    -वीर्य a.
    1 having great vigour.
    -2 of heroic strength, heroic, chivalrous.
    (-र्यम्) 1 great heroism
    -2 abundance of heroes.
    -3 the fruit of the jujube. (
    -र्या) wild cotton.
    -वृक्तिः f.
    1 a pure offering.
    -2 a hymn of praise.
    -वृत्त a.
    1 well-behaved, virtuous, good; मयि तस्य सुवृत्त वर्तते लघुसंदेशपदा सरस्वती R. 8.77.
    -2 well-rounded, beautifully globular or round; मृदुनातिसुवृत्तेन सुमृष्टेनातिहारिणा । मोदकेनापि किं तेन निष्पत्तिर्यस्य सेवया ॥ or सुमुखो$पि सुवृत्तो$पि सन्मार्गपतितो$पि च । महतां पादलग्नो$पि व्यथयत्येव कष्टकः ॥ (where all the adjectives are used in a double sense). (
    -त्तम्) a good or virtuous conduct; भर्तुश्चिन्तानुवर्तित्वं सुवृत्तं चानुजीविनाम् Pt.1.69. (
    -त्ता) a sort of grape.
    -वेल a.
    1 tranquil, still.
    -2 humble, quiet. (
    -लः) N. of the Trikūṭa mountain.
    -व्रत a. strict in the observance of religious vows, strictly virtuous or religious. (
    -तः) a religious student.
    (-ता) 1 a virtuous wife.
    -2 a tractable cow, one easily milked.
    -शंस a. well spoken of, famous, glorious, commendable.
    -शक a. capable of being easily done.
    -शर्मन् (m., f.) a person desiring intercourse (Uṇ.4. 165].
    -शल्यः the Khadira tree.
    -शाकम् undried ginger.
    -शारदः N. of Śiva.
    -शासित a. kept under control, well-controlled.
    -शिक्षित a. well-taught, trained, well- disciplined.
    -शिखः fire.
    (-खा) 1 a peacock's crest.
    -2 a cock's comb.
    -शीतम् yellow sandal-wood.
    -शीम a. cold, frigid. (
    -मः) coldness
    -शील a. good-tempered, amiable.
    (-ला) 1 N. of the wife of Yama.
    -2 N. of one of the eight favourite wives of Kriṣṇa.
    -शेव a. full of happiness; pleasant to be resorted; एष पन्था उरुगायः मुशेवः Ait. Br.7.13.11.
    -शोण a. dark-red.
    -श्रीका the gum olibanum tree.
    -श्रुत a.
    1 well heard.
    -2 versed in the Vedas.
    -3 gladly heard (also an ex- clamation at a श्राद्ध); पित्रे स्वदितमित्येव वाच्यं गोष्ठे तु सुश्रुतम् Ms.3.254. (
    -तः) N. of the author of a system of medicine, whose work, together with that of Charaka, is regardad as the oldest medical authority, and held in great esteem in India even to this day.
    -श्लिष्ट a.
    1 well-arranged or united.
    -2 well-fitted; Māl.1.
    -श्लेषः close union or embrace.
    -श्लोक्य a. very famous; तेजीयसामपि ह्येतन्न सुश्लोक्यं जगद्गुरो Bhāg.3.12.31.
    -संवीत a.
    1 well-girt; स ददर्श ततः श्रीमान् सुग्रीवं हेमपिङ्गलम् । सुसंवीतम्... Rām.4.16.15.
    -2 well dressed.
    -संवृतिः good concealment. a. well-concealed; परितप्तो$प्यपरः सुसंवृतिः Śi.16.23.
    -संस्कृत a.
    1 well cooked or prepared.
    -2 kept in good order; सुसंस्कृतोपस्करया व्यये चामुक्तहस्तया Ms.5.15.
    -संगृहीत a.
    1 well controlled or governed; सुसंगृहीतराष्ट्रो हि पार्थिवः सुखमेधते Ms.7.113.
    -2 well received.
    -3 well kept.
    -4 well abridged.
    -संध a. true to a promise.
    -संनत a. well-directed (as an arrow).
    -सत्या N. of the wife of Janaka.
    -सदृश् a. agreeable to look at.
    -समाहित a.
    1 well arranged, beautifully adorned; very beautiful; ऋतुकालं प्रतीक्षन्ते नार्थिनः सुसमाहिते । संगमं त्वहमिच्छामि त्वया सह सुमध्यमे ॥ Rām.1.48.18.
    -2 completely loaded; तद्यथानः सुसमा- हितमुत्सर्जद्यायात् Bṛi. Up.4.3.35.
    -3 Very intent, attentive.
    -समीहित a. much desired.
    - सरण N. of Śiva.
    -सह a.
    1 easy to be borne.
    -2 bearing or enduring well. (
    -हः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -सहाय a. having a good companion; प्रणेतुं शक्यते दण्डः सुसहायेन धीमता Ms.7.31.
    -साधित a. well trained or educated.
    -सार a. having good sap or essence.
    (-रः) 1 good sap, essence, or substance.
    -2 competence.
    -3 the red-flowering Kha- dira tree.
    -सारवत् n. crystal.
    -सिकता 1 good sand.
    -2 gravel.
    -3 sugar.
    -सुरप्रिया jasmine.
    -सेव्य a. to be well or easily followed (as a road).
    -सौभगम् con- jugal felicity.
    -स्थ a.
    1 well-suited, being in a good sense.
    -2 in health, healthy, faring well.
    -3 in good or prosperous circumstances, prosperous.
    -4 happy, fortunate. (
    -स्थम्) a happy state, well-being; प्रह्लाद सुस्थरूपोसि पश्यन् व्यसनमात्मनः Mb.12.222.12; सुस्थे को वा न पण्डितः H.3.114.
    -स्थित a. in the same sense as सुस्थ. (
    -तम्) a house with a gallery on all sides.
    -स्थितिः (also सुस्थता) f.
    1 good condition, well-being, welfare, happiness.
    -2 health, convalescence.
    -स्थिर a.
    1 stable.
    -2 resolute, cool.
    -स्नातः 1 one who bathes at the end of a sacrifice; L. D. B.
    -2 well purified by bathing.
    -स्मित a. pleasantly smiling. (
    -ता) a woman with a pleased or smiling countenance.
    -स्वपनः an epithet of Śiva.
    -स्वर a.
    1 melodious, harmonious.
    -2 loud. ˚यन्त्रकम् a kind of musical instrument; युता सुस्वरयन्त्रकैः Śukra.1.247.
    -हित a.
    1 very fit or suitable, appro- priate.
    -2 beneficial, salutary.
    -3 friendly, affection- ate.
    -4 satisfied; सहस्रनेत्रः सुहितत्वमाप न Rām. ch.2.64. (
    -ता) one of the seven tongues of fire.
    -हृद् a. having a kind heart, cordial, friendly, loving, affectionate; सुहृदः सुहृदो$न्यांश्च दुर्हृदश्चापि दुर्हृदः । सम्यक्प्रवृत्तान् पुरुषान्नसम्यगनुपश्यतः ॥ Mb.3.28.36. (-m.)
    1 a friend; सुहृदः पश्य वसन्त किं स्थितम् Ku.4.27; मन्दायन्ते न खलु सुहृदामभ्युपेतार्थकृत्याः Me.4.
    -2 an ally. ˚भेदः
    1 the separation of friends.
    -2 N. of the 2nd book of the हितोपदेश; मित्रलाभः सुहृद्भेदो विग्रहः संधिरेव च । पञ्चतन्त्रात्तथान्यस्माद् ग्रन्थादाकृष्य लिख्यते ॥ H. Pr.9. ˚वाक्यम् the counsel of a friend.
    -हृदः a friend.
    -हृदय a.
    1 good-hearted.
    -2 dear, affectionate, loving.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > सु _su

  • 78 obéir

    obéir [ɔbeiʀ]
    • obéir à [+ personne, ordre, principe, règle] to obey ; [+ critère] to meet ; [+ conscience, mode] to follow
    • obéissez ! do as you're told!
    * * *
    ɔbeiʀ
    verbe transitif indirect

    obéir à — to obey [ordre, devoir]; to follow [norme]; to observe [coutume]; to comply with [décision]

    obéir à quelqu'un — [soldat] to obey somebody; [enfant, employé] to do what one is told by somebody

    2) ( être soumis) [freins] to respond (à to)
    ••
    * * *
    ɔbeiʀ vi
    1) [personne] to obey

    obéir à qn — to obey s.o.

    Elle refuse d'obéir à ses parents. — She refuses to obey her parents.

    2) [moteur, véhicule]

    obéir à [conducteur, sollicitation] — to respond to

    * * *
    obéir verb table: finir vtr ind
    1 ( se soumettre) obéir à to obey [ordre, devoir, principe, règles]; to follow [norme, impulsion, émotion]; to observe [coutume]; obéir à qn [soldat] to obey sb; [enfant, employé] to do what one is told by sb; ne discute pas, obéis! don't argue, do as you're told!; elle se fait obéir de ses enfants her children always do as she says; obéir à une décision to comply with a decision; nous obéissons au moindre de ses caprices we give in to his ou her slightest whim;
    2 ( être soumis) [freins, véhicule] to respond (à to).
    obéir à qn au doigt et à l'œil to obey sb slavishly.
    [ɔbeir]
    obéir à verbe plus préposition
    1. [se soumettre à]
    obéir à quelqu'un/quelque chose to obey somebody/something
    savoir se faire obéir de quelqu'un to command ou to compel obedience from somebody
    obéir à un ordre to comply with ou to obey an order
    2. [être régi par]
    obéir à une théorie/un principe to obey ou to follow a theory/principle
    obéissant à une soif de vengeance moved ou prompted by a thirst for revenge
    3. [réagir à - suj: mécanisme]
    soudain les freins ont cessé d'obéir all of a sudden, the brakes stopped responding

    Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > obéir

  • 79 команда немедленного исполнения

    Русско-английский словарь по электронике > команда немедленного исполнения

  • 80 AT

    I) prep.
    A. with dative.
    I. Of motion;
    1) towards, against;
    Otkell laut at Skamkatli, bowed down to S.;
    hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge against A.;
    Brynjólfr gengr alit at honum, quite up to him;
    þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters with him;
    3) to, at;
    koma at landi, to come to land;
    ganga at dómi, to go into court;
    4) along (= eptir);
    ganga at stræti, to walk along the street;
    dreki er niðr fór at ánni (went down the river) fyrir strauminum;
    refr dró hörpu at ísi, on the ice;
    5) denoting hostility;
    renna (sœkja) at e-m, to rush at, assault;
    gerði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog;
    6) around;
    vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a veil round one’s head;
    bera grjót at e-m, to heap stones upon the body;
    7) denoting business, engagement;
    ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after horses, watching sheep;
    fara at landskuldum, to go collecting rents.
    II. Of position, &c.;
    1) denoting presence at, near, by, upon;
    at kirkju, at church;
    at dómi, in court;
    at lögbergi, at the hill of laws;
    2) denoting participation in;
    vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, wedding;
    3) ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at;
    kvalararnir, er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him;
    var þar at kona nökkur at binda (was there busy dressing) sár manna;
    4) with proper names of places (farms);
    konungr at Danmörku ok Noregi, king of;
    biskup at Hólum, bishop of Holar;
    at Helgafelli, at Bergþórshváli;
    5) used ellipt. with a genitive, at (a person’s) house;
    at hans (at his house) gisti fjölmenni mikit;
    at Marðar, at Mara’s home;
    at hins beilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church;
    at Ránar, at Ran’s (abode).
    III. Of time;
    1) at, in;
    at upphafi, at first, in the beginning;
    at skilnaði, at parting, when they parted;
    at páskum, at Easter;
    at kveldi, at eventide;
    at fjöru, at the ebb;
    at flœðum, at the floodtide;
    2) adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr’;
    at ári komanda, next year;
    at vári, er kemr, next spring;
    generally with ‘komanda’ understood;
    at sumri, hausti, vetri, vári, next summer, &c.;
    3) used with an absolute dative and present or past part.;
    at sér lifanda, duing his lifetime;
    at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all;
    at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the hearing of the chief;
    at upprennandi sólu, at sunrise;
    at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks are past;
    at honum önduðum, after his death;
    4) denoting uninterrupted succession, after;
    hverr at öðrum, annarr at öðrum, one after another;
    skildu menn at þessu, thereupon, after this;
    at því (thereafter) kómu aðrar meyjar.
    IV. fig. and in various uses;
    1) to, into, with the notion of destruction or change;
    brenna (borgina) at ösku, to burn to ashes;
    verða at ormi, to become a snake;
    2) for, as;
    gefa e-t at gjöf, as a present;
    eiga e-n at vin, to have one as friend;
    3) by;
    taka sverð at hjöltum, by the hilt;
    draga út björninn at hlustunum, by the ears;
    kjósa at afli, álitum, by strength, appearrance;
    auðigr at fé, wealthy in goods;
    vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face;
    5) as a law term, on the grounds of, by reason of;
    ryðja ( to challenge) dóm at mægðum, kvið at frændsemi;
    6) as a paraphrase of a genitive;
    faðir, móðir at barni (= barns, of a child);
    aðili at sök = aðili sakar;
    7) with adjectives denoting colour, size, age, of;
    hvítr, svartr, rauðr at lit, while, black, red of colour;
    mikill, lítill at stœrð, vexti, tall, small of stature;
    tvítugr at aldri, twenty years of age;
    kýr at fyrsta, öðrum kálfi, a cow that has calved once, twice;
    8) determining the source from which anything comes, of, from;
    Ari nam ok marga frœði at Þuríði (from her);
    þiggja, kaupa, geta, leigja e-t at e-m, to receive, buy, obtain, borrow a thing from one;
    hafa veg (virðing) styrk at e-m, to derive honour, power, from one;
    9) according, to, after (heygðr at fornum sið);
    at ráði allra vitrustu manna, by the advice of;
    at landslögum, by the law of the land;
    at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave;
    10) in adverbial phrases;
    gróa (vera grœddr) at heilu, to be quite healed;
    bíta af allt gras at snøggu, quite bare;
    at fullu, fully;
    at vísu, surely;
    at frjálsu, freely;
    at eilífu, for ever and ever;
    at röngu, at réttu, wrongly, rightly;
    at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same;
    at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent.
    B. with acc., after, upon (= eptir);
    sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, to take the inheritance after his father;
    at þat (= eptir þat), after that, thereafter;
    connected with a past part. or a., at Gamla fallinn, after the fall of Gamli;
    at Hrungni dauðan, upon the death of Hrungnir.
    1) as the simple mark of the infinitive, to;
    at ganga, at ríða, at hlaupa, to walk, to ride, to run;
    2) in an objective sense;
    hann bauð þeim at fara, sitja, he bade (ordered) them to go, sit;
    gefa e-m at eta, at drekka, to give one to eat, to drink;
    3) denoting design or purpose, in order to (hann gekk í borg at kaupa silfr).
    1) demonstrative particle before a comparative, the, all the, so much the;
    hón grét at meir, she wept the more;
    þykkir oss at líkara, all the more likely;
    þú ert maðr at verri (so much the worse), er þú hefir þetta mælt;
    2) rel. pron., who, which, that (= er);
    þeir allir, at þau tíðindi heyrðu, all those who heard;
    sem þeim er títt, at ( as is the custom of those who) kaupferðir reka.
    conj., that;
    1) introducing a subjective or objective clause;
    þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, it happened once that H.;
    vilda ek, at þú réðist austr í fjörðu, I should like you to go;
    2) relative to svá, denoting proportion, degree;
    svá mikill lagamaðr, at, so great a lawyer, that;
    3) with subj., denoting end or purpose, in order that (skáru þeir fyrir þá (viz. hestana) melinn, at þeir dœi eigi af sulti);
    4) since, because, as (= því at);
    5) connected with þó, því, svá;
    þó at (with subj.), though, although;
    því at, because, for;
    svá at, so that;
    6) temp., þá at (= þá er), when;
    þegar at (= þegar er), as soon as;
    þar til at (= þar til er), until, till;
    áðr at (= á. en), before;
    7) used superfluously after an int. pron. or adv.;
    Ólafr spurði, hvern styrk at hann mundi fá honum, what help he was likely to give him;
    in a relative sense; með fullkomnum ávexti, hverr at (which) þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða.
    V)
    negative verbal suffix, = ata; var-at, was not.
    odda at, Yggs at, battle.
    * * *
    1.
    and að, prep., often used ellipt. dropping the case and even merely as an adverb, [Lat. ad; Ulf. at = πρός and παρά, A. S. ät; Engl. at; Hel. ad = apud; O. H. G. az; lost in mod. Germ., and rare in Swed. and Dan.; in more freq. use in Engl. than any other kindred language, Icel. only excepted]:—the mod. pronunciation and spelling is að (aþ); this form is very old, and is found in Icel. vellum MSS. of the 12th century, e. g. aþ, 623. 60; yet in earlier times it was sounded with a tenuis, as we may infer from rhymes, e. g. jöfurr hyggi at | hve ek yrkja fat, Egill: Sighvat also makes it rhyme with a t. The verse by Thorodd—þar vastu at er fjáðr klæðið þvat (Skálda 162)—is hardly intelligible unless we accept the spelling with an aspirate (að), and say that þvað is = þvá = þváði, lavabat; it may be that by the time of Thorodd and Ari the pure old pronunciation was lost, or is ‘þvat’ simply the A. S. þvât, secuit? The Icelanders still, however, keep the tenuis in compounds before a vowel, or before h, v, or the liquids l, r, thus—atyrða, atorka, athöfn, athugi, athvarf, athlægi; atvinna, atvik; atlaga, atlíðanði ( slope), atriði, atreið, atróðr: but aðdjúpr, aðfinsla (critic), aðferð, aðkoma, aðsókn, aðsúgr (crowding), aðgæzla. In some words the pronunciation is irregular, e. g. atkvæði not aðkv-; atburðr, but aðbúnaðr; aðhjúkran not athjúkran; atgörvi not aðgörfi. At, to, towards; into; against; along, by; in regard to; after.
    Mostly with dat.; rarely with acc.; and sometimes ellipt.—by dropping the words ‘home,’ ‘house,’ or the like—with gen.
    WITH DAT.
    A. LOC.
    I. WITH MOTION; gener. the motion to the borders, limits of an object, and thus opp. to frá:
    1. towards, against, with or without the notion of arrival, esp. connected with verbs denoting motion (verba movendi et eundi), e. g. fara, ganga, koma, lúta, snúa, rétta at…; Otkell laut at Skamkatli, O. louted (i. e. bowed down) towards S., Nj. 77, Fms. xi. 102; sendimaðrinn sneri ( turned) hjöltum sverðsins at konungi, towards the king, i. 15; hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge towards A., Nj. 220; rétta e-t at e-m, to reach, hand over, Ld. 132; ganga at, to step towards, Ísl. ii. 259.
    2. denoting proximity, close up to, up to; Brynjólfr gengr … allt at honum, B. goes quite up to him, Nj. 58; Gunnarr kom þangat at þeim örunum, G. reached them even there with his arrows, 115; þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters, id.; reið maðr at þeim (up to them), 274; þeir höfðu rakit sporin allt at ( right up to) gammanum, Fms. i. 9; komu þeir at sjó fram, came down to the sea, Bárð. 180.
    3. without reference to the space traversed, to or at; koma at landi, to land, Ld. 38, Fms. viii. 358; ríða at dyrum, Boll. 344; hlaupa at e-m, to run up to, run at, Fms. vii. 218, viii. 358; af sjáfarganginum er hann gekk at landinu, of the surf dashing against the shore, xi. 6; vísa ólmum hundi at manni, to set a fierce hound at a man, Grág. ii. 118; leggja e-n at velli, to lay low, Eg. 426, Nj. 117; hníga at jörðu, at grasi, at moldu, to bite the dust, to die, Njarð. 378; ganga at dómi, a law term, to go into court, of a plaintiff, defendant, or bystander, Nj. 87 (freq.)
    4. denoting a motion along, into, upon; ganga at stræti, to walk along the street, Korm. 228, Fms. vii. 39; at ísi, on the ice, Skálda 198, Fms. vii. 19, 246, viii. 168, Eb. 112 new Ed. (á is perh. wrong); máttu menn ganga bar yfir at skipum einum, of ships alone used as a bridge, Fas. i. 378; at höfðum, at nám, to trample on the slain on the battle-field, Lex. Poët.; at ám, along the rivers; at merkiósum, at the river’s mouth, Grág. ii. 355; at endilöngu baki, all along its back, Sks. 100.
    5. denoting hostility, to rush at, assault; renna at, hlaupa at, ganga, fara, ríða, sækja, at e-m, (v. those words), whence the nouns atrenna, athlaup, atgangr, atför, atreið, atsókn, etc.
    β. metaph., kom at þeim svefnhöfgi, deep sleep fell on them, Nj. 104. Esp. of weather, in the impers. phrase, hríð, veðr, vind, storm görir at e-m, to be overtaken by a snow storm, gale, or the like; görði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog, Bárð. 171.
    6. denoting around, of clothing or the like; bregða skikkju at höfði sér, to wrap his cloak over his head, Ld. 62; vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a snood round her head, 188; sauma at, to stick, cling close, as though sewn on; sauma at höndum sér, of tight gloves, Bs. i. 453; kyrtill svá þröngr sem saumaðr væri at honum, as though it were stitched to him, Nj. 214; vafit at vándum dreglum, tight laced with sorry tags, id.; hosa strengd fast at beini, of tight hose, Eg. 602; hann sveipar at sér iðrunum ok skyrtunni, he gathers up the entrails close to him and the skirt too, Gísl. 71; laz at síðu, a lace on the side, to keep the clothes tight, Eg. 602.
    β. of burying; bera grjót at einum, to heap stones upon the body, Eg. 719; var gör at þeim dys or grjóti, Ld. 152; gora kistu at líki, to make a coffin for a body, Eb. 264, Landn. 56, Ld. 142.
    γ. of summoning troops or followers; stefna at sér mönnum, to summon men to him, Nj. 104; stefna at sér liði, Eg. 270; kippa mönnum at sér, to gather men in haste, Ld. 64.
    7. denoting a business, engagement; ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after after horses, watching sheep, Glúm. 362, Nj. 75; fara at fé, to go to seek for sheep, Ld. 240; fara at heyi, to go a-haymaking, Dropl. 10; at veiðum, a-hunting; at fuglum, a-fowling; at dýrum, a-sbooting; at fiski, a-fishing; at veiðiskap, Landn. 154, Orkn. 416 (in a verse), Nj. 25; fara at landskuldum, to go a-collecling rents, Eg. 516; at Finnkaupum, a-marketing with Finns, 41; at féföngum, a-plundering, Fms. vii. 78; ganga at beina, to wait on guests, Nj. 50; starfa at matseld, to serve at table, Eb. 266; hitta e-n at nauðsynjum, on matters of business; at máli, to speak with one, etc., Fms. xi. 101; rekast at e-m, to pursue one, ix. 404; ganga at liði sér, to go suing for help, Grág. ii. 384.
    β. of festivals; snúa, fá at blóti, veizlu, brullaupi, to prepare for a sacrificial banquet, wedding, or the like, hence at-fangadagr, Eb. 6, Ld. 70; koma at hendi, to happen, befall; ganga at sínu, to come by one’s own, to take it, Ld. 208; Egill drakk hvert full er at honum kom, drained every horn that came to him, Eg. 210; komast at keyptu, to purchase dearly, Húv. 46.
    8. denoting imaginary motion, esp. of places, cp. Lat. spectare, vergere ad…, to look or lie towards; horfði botninn at höfðanum, the bight of the bay looked toward the headland, Fms. i. 340, Landn. 35; also, skeiðgata liggr at læknum, leads to the brook, Ísl. ii. 339; á þann arminn er vissi at sjánum, on that wing which looked toward the sea, Fms. viii. 115; sár þau er horft höfðu at Knúti konungi, xi. 309.
    β. even connected with verbs denoting motion; Gilsáreyrr gengr austan at Fljótinu, G. extends, projects to F. from the east, Hrafh. 25; hjá sundi því, er at gengr þingstöðinni, Fms. xi. 85.
    II. WITHOUT MOTION; denoting presence at, near, by, at the side of, in, upon; connected with verbs like sitja, standa, vera…; at kirkju, at church, Fms. vii. 251, K. f). K. 16, Ld. 328, Ísl. ii. 270, Sks. 36; vera at skála, at húsi, to be in, at home, Landn. 154; at landi, Fms. i. 82; at skipi, on shipboard, Grág. i. 209, 215; at oldri, at a banquet, inter pocula; at áti, at dinner, at a feast, inter edendum, ii. 169, 170; at samförum ok samvistum, at public meetings, id.; at dómi, in a court; standa (to take one’s stand) norðan, sunnan, austan, vestan at dómi, freq. in the proceedings at trials in lawsuits, Nj.; at þingi, present at the parliament, Grág. i. 142; at lögbergi, o n the hill of laws, 17, Nj.; at baki e-m, at the back of.
    2. denoting presence, partaking in; sitja at mat, to sit at meat, Fms. i. 241; vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, nuptials, Nj. 51, Ld. 70: a law term, vera at vígi, to be an accessory in manslaying, Nj. 89, 100; vera at e-u simply means to be about, be busy in, Fms. iv. 237; standa at máli, to stand by one in a case, Grág. ii. 165, Nj. 214; vera at fóstri, to be fostered, Fms. i. 2; sitja at hégóma, to listen to nonsense, Ld. 322; vera at smíð, to be at one’s work, Þórð. 62: now absol., vera at, to go on with, be busy at.
    3. the law term vinna eið at e-u has a double meaning:
    α. vinna eið at bók, at baugi, to make an oath upon the book by laying the band upon it, Landn. 258, Grág., Nj.; cp. Vkv. 31, Gkv. 3. 3, Hkv. 2. 29, etc.: ‘við’ is now used in this sense.
    β. to confirm a fact (or the like) by an oath, to swear to, Grág. i. 9, 327.
    γ. the law phrase, nefna vátta at e-u, of summoning witnesses to a deed, fact, or the like; nefna vátta at benjum, to produce evidence, witnesses as to the wounds, Nj., Grág.; at görð, Eg. 738; at svörum, Grág. i. 19: this summoning of witnesses served in old lawsuits the same purpose as modern pleadings and depositions; every step in a suit to be lawful must be followed by such a summoning or declaration.
    4. used ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at; kvalararnir er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him; þar varstu at, you were there present, Skálda 162; at várum þar, Gísl. (in a verse): as a law term ‘vera at’ means to be guilty, Glúm. 388; vartattu at þar, Eg. (in a verse); hence the ambiguity of Glum’s oath, vask at þar, I was there present: var þar at kona nokkur ( was there busy) at binda sár manna, Fms. v. 91; hann var at ok smíðaði skot, Rd. 313; voru Varbelgir at ( about) at taka af, þau lög …, Fms. ix. 512; ek var at ok vafk, I was about weaving, xi. 49; þeir höfðu verit at þrjú sumur, they had been busy at it for three summers, x. 186 (now very freq.); koma at, come in, to arrive unexpectedly; Gunnarr kom at í því, G. came in at that moment; hvaðan komtú nú at, whence did you come? Nj. 68, Fms. iii. 200.
    5. denoting the kingdom or residence of a king or princely person; konungr at Danmörk ok Noregi, king of…, Fms. i. 119, xi. 281; konungr, jarl, at öllum Noregi, king, earl, over all N., íb. 3, 13, Landn. 25; konungr at Dyflinni, king of Dublin, 25; but í or yfir England!, Eg. 263: cp. the phrase, sitja at landi, to reside, of a king when at home, Hkr. i. 34; at Joini, Fms. xi. 74: used of a bishop; biskup at Hólum, bishop of Hólar, Íb. 18, 19; but biskup í Skálaholti, 19: at Rómi, at Rome, Fbr. 198.
    6. in denoting a man’s abode (vide p. 5, col. 1, l. 27), the prep. ‘at’ is used where the local name implies the notion of by the side of, and is therefore esp. applied to words denoting a river, brook, rock, mountain, grove, or the like, and in some other instances, by, at, e. g. at Hofi (a temple), Landn. 198; at Borg ( a castle), 57; at Helgafelli (a mountain), Eb. constantly so; at Mosfelli, Landn. 190; at Hálsi (a hill), Fms. xi. 22; at Bjargi, Grett. 90; Hálsum, Landn. 143; at Á ( river), 296, 268; at Bægisá, 212; Giljá, 332; Myrká, 211; Vatnsá, id.; þverá, Glúm. 323; at Fossi (a ‘force’ or waterfall), Landn. 73; at Lækjamoti (waters-meeting), 332; at Hlíðarenda ( end of the lithe or hill), at Bergþórshváli, Nj.; at Lundi (a grove), at Melum (sandhill), Landn. 70: the prep. ‘á’ is now used in most of these cases, e. g. á Á, á Hofi, Helgafelli, Felli, Hálsi, etc.
    β. particularly, and without any regard to etymology, used of the abode of kings or princes, to reside at; at Uppsölum, at Haugi, Alreksstöðum, at Hlöðum, Landn., Fms.
    γ. konungr lét kalla at stofudyrum, the king made a call at the hall door, Eg. 88; þeir kölluðu at herberginu, they called at the inn, Fms. ix. 475.
    7. used ellipt. with a gen., esp. if connected with such words as gista, to be a guest, lodge, dine, sup (of festivals or the like) at one’s home; at Marðar, Nj. 4; at hans, 74; þingfesti at þess bóanda, Grág. i. 152; at sín, at one’s own home, Eg. 371, K. Þ. K. 62; hafa náttstað at Freyju, at the abode of goddess Freyja, Eg. 603; at Ránar, at Ran’s, i. e. at Ran’s house, of drowned men who belong to the queen of the sea, Ran, Eb. 274; at hins heilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church, Fms. vi. 63: cp. ad Veneris, εις Κίμωνος.
    B. TEMP.
    I. at, denoting a point or period of time; at upphafi, at first, in the beginning, Ld. 104; at lyktum, at síðustu, at lokum, at last; at lesti, at last, Lex. Poët., more freq. á lesti; at skilnaði, at parting, at last, Band. 3; at fornu, in times of yore, formerly, Eg. 267, D. I. i. 635; at sinni, as yet, at present; at nýju, anew, of present time; at eilífu, for ever and ever; at skömmu, soon, shortly, Ísl. ii. 272, v. l.
    II. of the very moment when anything happens, the beginning of a term; denoting the seasons of the year, months, weeks, the hours of the day; at Jólum, at Yule, Nj. 46; at Pálmadegi, on Palm Sunday, 273; at Páskum, at Easter; at Ólafsvöku, on St. Olave’s eve, 29th of July, Fms.; at vetri, at the beginning of the winter, on the day when winter sets in, Grág. 1. 151; at sumarmálum, at vetrnáttum; at Tvímánaði, when the Double month (August) begins, Ld. 256, Grág. i. 152; at kveldi, at eventide, Eg. 3; at því meli, at that time; at eindaga, at the term, 395; at eykð, at 4 o’clock p. m., 198; at öndverðri æfi Abra hams, Ver. II; at sinni, now at once, Fms. vi. 71; at öðruhverju, every now and then.
    β. where the point of time is marked by some event; at þingi, at the meeting of parliament (18th to the 24th of June), Ld. 182; at féránsdómi, at the court of execution, Grág. i. 132, 133; at þinglausnum, at the close of the parliament (beginning of July), 140; at festarmálum, eðr at eiginorði, at betrothal or nuptials, 174; at skilnaði, when they parted, Nj. 106 (above); at öllum minnum, at the general drinking of the toasts, Eg. 253; at fjöru, at the ebb; at flæðum, at flood tide, Fms. viii. 306, Orkn. 428; at hrörum, at an inquest, Grág. i. 50 (cp. ii. 141, 389); at sökum, at prosecutions, 30; at sinni, now, as yet, v. that word.
    III. ellipt., or adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr,’ of the future time:
    1. ellipt., komanda or the like being understood, with reference to the seasons of the year; at sumri, at vetri, at hausti, at vári, next summer, winter…, Ísl. ii. 242; at miðju sumri, at ári, at Midsummer, next year, Fas. i. 516; at miðjum vetri, Fms. iv. 237,
    2. adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr;’ at ári komanda, Bárð. 177; at vári er kemr, Dipl. iii. 6.
    IV. used with an absolute dat. and with a pres. part.:
    1. with pres. part.; at morni komanda, on the coming morrow, Fms. i. 263; at sér lifanda, in vivo, in his life time, Grág. ii. 202; at þeim sofundum, illis dormientibus, Hkr. i. 234; at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all, Fms. x. 329; at úvitanda konungi, illo nesciente, without his knowledge, 227; at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the chief’s bearing, 235.
    2. of past time with a past part. (Lat. abl. absol.); at hræjum fundnum, on the bodies being found, Grág. ii. 87; at háðum dómum ok föstu þingi, during the session, the courts being set, i. 484; at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks past, Band. 13; at svá búnu, so goru, svá komnu, svá mæltu (Lat. quibus rebus gestis, dictis, quo facto, dicto, etc.), v. those words; at úreyndu, without trial, without put ting one to the test, Ld. 76; at honum önduðum, illo mortuo.
    3. ellipt. without ‘at;’ en þessum hlutum fram komnum, when all this has been done, Eb. 132.
    V. in some phrases with a slight temp, notion; at görðum gildum, the fences being strong, Gþl. 387; at vörmu spori, at once, whilst the trail is warm; at úvörum, unawares, suddenly, Nj. 95, Ld. 132; at þessu, at this cost, on that condition, Eb. 38, Nj. 55; at illum leiki, to have a narrow escape, now við illan leik, Fms. ix. 473; at því, that granted, Grág. ii. 33: at því, at pessu, thereafter, thereupon, Nj. 76.
    2. denoting succession, without interruption, one after another; hverr at öðrum, annarr maðr at öðrum, aðrir at öðrum; eina konu at annarri, Eg. 91, Fms. ii. 236, vi. 25, Bs. i. 22, 625. 80, H. E. i. 522.
    C. METAPH. and in various cases:
    I. denoting a transformation or change into, to, with the notion of destruction; brenna at ösku, at köldum kolum, to burn to ashes, to be quite destroyed, Fms. i. 105, Edda 3, Sturl. ii. 51: with the notion of transformation or transfiguration, in such phrases as, verða at e-u, göra e-t at e-u, to turn it into:
    α. by a spell; verða at ormi, to become a snake, Fms. xi. 158; at flugdrekum, Gullþ. 7; urðu þau bönd at járni, Edda 40.
    β. by a natural process it can often be translated by an acc. or by as; göra e-n at urðarmanni, to make him an outlaw, Eg. 728; græða e-n at orkumlamanni, to heal him so as to maim him for life, of bad treatment by a leech, Eb. 244: in the law terms, sár görist at ben, a wound turning into a ben, proving to be mortal, Grág., Nj.; verða at ljúgvætti, to prove to be a false evidence, Grág. i. 44; verða at sætt, to turn into reconciliation, Fms. i. 13; göra e-t at reiði málum, to take offence at, Fs. 20; at nýjum tíðindum, to tell as news, Nj. 14; verða fátt at orðum, to be sparing of words, 18; kveðr (svá) at orði, to speak, utter, 10; verða at þrifnaði, to geton well, Fms. vii. 196: at liði, at skaða, to be a help or hurt to one; at bana, to cause one’s death, Nj. 223, Eg. 21, Grág. ii. 29: at undrum, at hlátri, to become a wonder, a laughing-stock, 623. 35, Eg. 553.
    II. denoting capacity, where it may be translated merely by as or for; gefa at Jólagjöf, to give for a Christmas-box, Eg. 516; at gjöf, for a present; at erfð, at láni, launum, as an inheritance, a loan; at kaupum ok sökum, for buying and selling, Ísl. ii. 223, Grág. i. 423; at solum, ii. 204; at herfangi, as spoil or plunder; at sakbótum, at niðgjöldum, as a compensation, weregeld, i. 339, ii. 171, Hkr. ii. 168; taka at gíslingu, to take as an hostage, Edda 15; eiga e-n at vin, at óvin, to have one as friend or foe, illt er at eiga þræl at eingavin, ‘tis ill to have a thrall for one’s bosom friend (a proverb), Nj. 77; fæða, eiga, at sonum (syni), to beget a son, Edda 8, Bs. i. 60 (but eiga at dóttur cannot be said); hafa möttul at yfirhöfn, Fms. vii. 201; verða nökkut at manni (mönnum), to turn out to be a worthy man; verða ekki at manni, to turn out a worthless person, xi. 79, 268.
    2. in such phrases as, verða at orðum, to come towards, Nj. 26; var þat at erindum, Eg. 148; hafa at veizlum, to draw veizlur ( dues) from, Fms. iv. 275, Eg. 647; gora e-t at álitum, to take it into consideration, Nj. 3.
    III. denoting belonging to, fitting, of parts of the whole or the like; vóru at honum (viz. the sword) hjölt gullbúin, the sword was ornamented with a hilt of gold, Ld. 330; umgörð at ( belonging to) sverði, Fs. 97 (Hs.) in a verse; en ef mór er eigi at landinu, if there be no turf moor belonging to the land, Grág. ii. 338; svá at eigi brotnaði nokkuð at Orminum, so that no harm happened to the ship Worm, Fms. x. 356; hvatki er meiðir at skipinu eðr at reiðinu eðr at viðum, damage done t o …, Grág. ii. 403; lesta ( to injure) hús at lásum, við eðr torfi, 110; ef land hefir batnað at húsum, if the land has been bettered as to its buildings, 210; cp. the phrase, göra at e-u, to repair: hamlaðr at höndum eðr fótum, maimed as to hands or feet, Eg. 14; heill at höndum en hrumr at fótum, sound in band, palsied in foot, Fms. vii. 12; lykill at skrá, a key belonging, fitting, to the latch; hurð at húsi; a key ‘gengr at’ ( fits) skrá; and many other phrases. 2. denoting the part by which a thing is held or to which it belongs, by; fá, taka at…, to grasp by …; þú tókt við sverði hans at hjöltunum, you took it by the bill, Fms. i. 15; draga út björninn at hlustum, to pull out the bear by the ears, Fas. ii. 237; at fótum, by the feet, Fms. viii. 363; mæla ( to measure) at hrygg ok at jaðri, by the edge or middle of the stuff, Grág. i. 498; kasta e-m at höfði, head foremost, Nj. 84; kjósa e-n at fótum, by the feet alone, Edda 46; hefja frændsemi at bræðrum, eða at systkynum, to reckon kinship by the brother’s or the sister’s side, Grág. i. 28; kjósa at afli, at álitum, by strength, sight, Gs. 8, belongs rather to the following.
    IV. in respect of, as regards, in regard to, as to; auðigr at fé, wealthy of goods, Nj. 16, 30, 51; beztir hestar at reið, the best racehorses, 186; spekingr at viti, a man of great intellect, Ld. 124; vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face, Nj. 30, Bs. i. 61; kvenna vænst at ásjónu ok vits munum, of surpassing beauty and intellect, Ld. 122; fullkominn at hyggju, 18; um fram aðra menn at vinsældum ok harðfengi, of surpassing popularity and hardihood, Eb. 30.
    2. a law term, of challenging jurors, judges, or the like, on account of, by reason of; ryðja ( to challenge) at mægðum, guðsifjum, frændsemi, hrörum …; at leiðarlengd, on account of distance, Grág. i. 30, 50, Nj. (freq.)
    3. in arithm. denoting proportion; at helmingi, þriðjungi, fjórðungi, tíunda hluta, cp. Lat. ex asse, quadrante, for the half, third… part; máttr skal at magni (a proverb), might and main go together, Hkr. ii. 236; þú munt vera at því mikill fræðimaðr á kvæði, in the same proportion, as great, Fms. vi. 391, iii. 41; at e-s hluta, at… leiti, for one’s part, in turn, as far as one is con cerned, Grág. i. 322, Eg. 309, Fms. iii. 26 (freq.): at öðrum kosti, in the other case, otherwise (freq.) More gener., at öllu, öngu, in all (no) respects; at sumu, einhverju, nokkru, partly; at flestu, mestu, chiefly.
    4. as a paraphrase of a genitive; faðir, móðir at barni (= barns); aðili at sök (= sakar a.); morðingi at barni (= barns), faðerni at barni (barns); illvirki at fé manna (cp. Lat. felo de se), niðrfall at sökum (saka), land gangr at fiskum (fiska), Fms. iv. 274, Grág. i. 277, 416, N. G. L. i. 340, K. Þ. K. 112, Nj. 21.
    5. the phrase ‘at sér,’ of himself or in himself, either ellipt. or by adding the participle görr, and with the adverbs vel, ilia, or the like; denoting breeding, bearing, endowments, character …; væn kona, kurteis ok vel at sér, an accomplished, well-bred, gifted lady, Nj. I; vitr maðr ok vel at sér, a wise man and thoroughly good in feeling and bearing, 5; þú ert maðr vaskr ok vel at þér, 49; gerr at sér, accomplished, 51; bezt at sér görr, the finest, best bred man, 39, Ld. 124; en þó er hann svá vel at sér, so generous, Nj. 77; þeir höfðingjar er svá vóru vel at sér, so noble-minded, 198, Fms. i. 160: the phrase ‘at sér’ is now only used of knowledge, thus maðr vel að sér means clever, a man of great knowledge; illa að sér, a blockhead.
    6. denoting relations to colour, size, value, age, and the like; hvitr, svartr, grár, rauðr … at lit, white, swarthy, gray, red … of colour, Bjarn. 55, 28, Ísl. ii. 213, etc.; mikill, lítill, at stærð, vexti, tall, small of size, etc.; ungr, gamall, barn, at aldri, young, old, a child of age; tvítugr, þrítugr … at aldri, twenty, thirty … years of age (freq.): of animals; kyr at fyrsta, öðrum … kálfi, a cow having calved once, twice…, Jb. 346: value, amount, currency of money, kaupa e-t at mörk, at a mark, N. G. L. 1. 352; ok er eyririnn at mörk, amounts to a mark, of the value of money, Grág. i. 392; verðr þá at hálfri murk vaðmála eyrir, amounts to a half a mark, 500.
    β. metaph. of value, connected with verbs denoting to esteem, hold; meta, hafa, halda at miklu, litlu, vettugi, engu, or the like, to hold in high or low esteem, to care or not to care for (freq.): geta e-s at góðu, illu, öngu, to mention one favourably, unfavourably, indifferently … (freq.), prop. in connection with. In many cases it may be translated by in; ekki er mark at draumum, there is no meaning in dreams, no heed is to be paid to dreams, Sturl. ii. 217; bragð er at þá barnið finnr, it goes too far, when even a child takes offence (a proverb): hvat er at því, what does it mean? Nj. 11; hvert þat skip er vöxtr er at, any ship of mark, i. e. however small, Fms. xi. 20.
    V. denoting the source of a thing:
    1. source of infor mation, to learn, perceive, get information from; Ari nam ok marga fræði at Þuríði, learnt as her pupil, at her hands, as St. Paul at the feet of Gamaliel, (just as the Scotch say to speer or ask at a person); Ari nam at Þorgeiri afraðskoll, Hkr. (pref.); nema kunnáttu at e-m, used of a pupil, Fms. i. 8; nema fræði at e-m, xi. 396.
    2. of receiving, acquiring, buying, from; þiggja e-t at e-m, to receive a thing at his hands, Nj. 51; líf, to be pardoned, Fms. x. 173; kaupa land at e-m, to buy it from, Landn. 72, Íb. II, (now af is more freq. in this sense); geta e-t at e-m, to obtain, procure at one’s hands, impetrare; þeirra manna er þeir megu þat geta at, who are willing to do that, Grág. i. I; heimta e-t at e-m (now af), to call in, demand (a debt, money), 279; fala e-t at e-m (now af), to chaffer for or cheapen anything, Nj. 73; sækja e-t at e-m, to ask, seek for; sækja heilræði ok traust at e-m, 98; leiga e-t at e-m (now af), to borrow, Grág. ii. 334; eiga e-t (fé, skuld) at e-m, to be owed money by any one, i. 399: metaph. to deserve of one, Nj. 113; eiga mikit at e-m, to have much to do with, 138; hafa veg, virðing, styrk, at, to derive honour, power from, Fms. vi. 71, Eg. 44, Bárð. 174; gagn, to be of use, Ld. 216; mein, tálma, mischief, disadvantage, 158, 216, cp. Eg. 546; ótta, awe, Nj. 68.
    VI. denoting conformity, according to, Lat. secundum, ex, after; at fornum sið, Fms. i. 112; at sögn Ara prests, as Ari relates, on his authority, 55; at ráði allra vitrustu manna, at the advice of, Ísl. ii. 259, Ld. 62; at lögum, at landslögum, by the law of the land, Grág., Nj.; at líkindum, in all likelihood, Ld. 272; at sköpum, in due course (poet.); at hinum sama hætti, in the very same manner, Grág. i. 90; at vánum, as was to be expected, Nj. 255; at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave, Eg. 35; úlofi, Grág. ii. 215; at ósk, vilja e-s, as one likes…; at mun, id. (poet.); at sólu, happily (following the course of the sun), Bs. i. 70, 137; at því sem …, as to infer from …, Nj. 124: ‘fara, láta, ganga at’ denotes to yield, agree to, to comply with, give in, Ld. 168, Eg. 18, Fms. x. 368.
    VII. in phrases nearly or quite adverbial; gróa, vera græddr, at heilu, to be quite healed, Bárð. 167, Eb. 148; bíta at snöggu, to bite it bare, Fms. xi. 6; at þurru, till it becomes dry, Eb. 276; at endilöngu, all along, Fas. ii; vinnast at litlu, to avail little, 655 x. 14; at fullu, fully, Nj. 257, Hkr. i. 171; at vísu, of a surety, surely, Ld. 40; at frjálsu, freely, 308; at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same, Hom. 80, Nj. 267; at röngu, wrongly, 686 B. 2; at hófi, temperately, Lex. Poët.; at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent; at hringum, utterly, all round, (rare), Fms. x. 389; at einu, yet, Orkn. 358; svá at einu, því at einu, allt at einu, yet, however, nevertheless.
    VIII. connected with comparatives of adverbs and adjectives, and strengthening the sense, as in Engl. ‘the,’ so much the more, all the more; ‘at’ heldr tveimr, at ek munda gjarna veita yðr öllum, where it may be translated by so much the more to two, as I would willingly grant it to all of you; hon grét at meir, she grat (wept) the more, Eg. 483; þykir oss at líkara, all the more likely, Fms. viii. 6; þess at harðari, all the harder, Sturl. iii. 202 C; svá at hinn sé bana at nær, Grág. ii. 117; at auðnara, at hólpnara, the more happy, Al. 19, Grett. 116 B; þess at meiri, Fms. v. 64; auvirðismaðr at meiri, Sturl. ii. 139; maðr at vaskari, id.; at feigri, any the more fey, Km. 22; maðr at verri, all the worse, Nj. 168; ok er ‘at’ firr…, at ek vil miklu heldr, cp. Lat. tantum abest… ut, Eg. 60.
    β. following after a negation; eigi at síðr, no less, Nj. 160, Ld. 146; eigi… at meiri maðr, any better, Eg. 425, 489; erat héra at borgnara, any the better off for that, Fms. vii. 116; eigi at minni, no less for that, Edda (pref.) 146; eigi at minna, Ld. 216, Fms. ix. 50; ekki at verri drengr, not a bit worse for that, Ld. 42; er mér ekki son minn at bættari, þótt…, 216; at eigi vissi at nær, any more, Fas. iii. 74.
    IX. following many words:
    1. verbs, esp. those denoting, a. to ask, enquire, attend, seek, e. g. spyrja at, to speer (ask) for; leita at, to seek for; gæta, geyma at, to pay attention to; huga, hyggja at; hence atspurn, to enquire, aðgæzla, athugi, attention, etc.
    β. verbs denoting laughter, play, joy, game, cp. the Engl. to play at …, to laugh at …; hlæja, brosa at e-u, to laugh, smile at it; leika (sér) at e-u, to play at; þykja gaman at, to enjoy; hæða, göra gys at …, to make sport at …
    γ. verbs denoting assistance, help; standa, veita, vinna, hjálpa at; hence atstoð, atvinna, atverk:—mode, proceeding; fara at, to proceed, hence atför and atferli:—compliance; láta, fara at e-u, v. above:— fault; e-t er at e-u, there is some fault in it, Fms. x. 418; skorta at e-u, to fall short of, xi. 98:—care, attendance; hjúkra at, hlýja at, v. these words:—gathering, collecting; draga, reiða, flytja, fá at, congerere:—engagement, arrival, etc.; sækja at, to attack; ganga at, vera at, to be about; koma at, ellipt. to arrive: göra at, to repair: lesta at, to impair (v. above); finna at, to criticise (mod.); telja at, id.: bera at, to happen; kveða at e-m, to address one, 625. 15, (kveða at (ellipt.) now means to pronounce, and of a child to utter (read) whole syllables); falla at, of the flood-tide (ellipt.): metaph. of pains or straits surrounding one; þreyngja, herða at, to press hard: of frost and cold, with regard to the seasons; frjósa at, kólna at, to get really cold (SI. 44), as it were from the cold stiffening all things: also of the seasons themselves; hausta, vetra að, when the season really sets in; esp. the cold seasons, ‘sumra at’ cannot be used, yet we may say ‘vára að’ when the spring sets in, and the air gets mild.
    δ. in numberless other cases which may partly be seen below.
    2. connected ellipt. with adverbs denoting motion from a place; norðan, austan, sunnan, vestan at, those from the north, east…; utan at, innan at, from the outside or inside.
    3. with adjectives (but rarely), e. g. kærr, elskr, virkr (affectionate), vandr (zealous), at e-m; v. these words.
    WITH ACC.
    TEMP.: Lat. post, after, upon, esp. freq. in poetry, but rare in prose writers, who use eptir; nema reisi niðr at nið (= maðr eptir mann), in succession, of erecting a monument, Hm. 71; in prose, at þat. posthac, deinde, Fms. x. 323, cp. Rm., where it occurs several times, 2, 6, 9, 14, 18, 24, 28, 30, 35; sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, has to take the inheritance after his father, Grág. i. 170 new Ed.; eiga féránsdóm at e-n, Grág. i. 89; at Gamla fallinn, after the death of G., Fms. x. 382; in Edda (Gl.) 113 ought to be restored, grét ok at Oð, gulli Freyja, she grat (wept) tears of gold for her lost husband Od. It is doubtful if it is ever used in a purely loc. sense; at land, Grág. (Sb.)ii. 211, is probably corrupt; at hönd = á hönd, Grág. (Sb.) i. 135; at mót = at móti, v. this word.
    ☞ In compounds (v. below) at- or að- answers in turn to Lat. ad- or in- or con-; atdráttr e. g. denotes collecting; atkoma is adventus: it may also answer to Lat. ob-, in atburðr = accidence, but might also be compared with Lat. occurrere.
    2.
    and að, the mark of the infinitive [cp. Goth. du; A. S. and Engl. to; Germ. zu]. Except in the case of a few verbs ‘at’ is always placed immediately before the infinitive, so as to be almost an inseparable part of the verb.
    I. it is used either,
    1. as, a simple mark of the infinitive, only denoting an action and independent of the subject, e. g. at ganga, at hlaupa, at vita, to go, to run, to know; or,
    2. in an objective sense when following such verbs as bjóða segja…, to invite, command …; hann bauð þeim at ganga, at sitja, be bade, ordered them to go, sit, or the like; or as gefa and fá; gefa e-m at drekka, at eta, to give one to drink or to eat, etc. etc.
    β. with the additional notion of intention, esp. when following verba cogitandi; hann ætlaði, hafði í hyggju at fara, he had it in his mind to go (where ‘to go’ is the real object to ætlaði and hafði í hyggju).
    3. answering to the Gr. ινα, denoting intention, design, in order to; hann gékk í borg at kaupa silfr, in order to buy, Nj. 280; hann sendi riddara sína með þeim at varðveita þær, 623. 45: in order to make the phrase more plain, ‘svá’ and ‘til’ are frequently added, esp. in mod. writers, ‘svá at’ and contr. ‘svát’ (the last however is rare), ‘til at’ and ‘til þess at,’ etc.
    II. in the earlier times the infin., as in Greek and Lat., had no such mark; and some verbs remain that cannot be followed by ‘at;’ these verbs are almost the same in Icel. as in Engl.:
    α. the auxiliary verbs vil, mun ( μέλλω), skal; as in Engl. to is never used after the auxiliaries shall, will, must; ek vil ganga, I will go; ek mun fara, (as in North. E.) I mun go; ek skal göra þat, I shall do that, etc.
    β. the verbs kunna, mega, as in Engl. I can or may do, I dare say; svá hygginn at hann kunni fyrir sökum ráða, Grág. ii. 75; í öllu er prýða má góðan höfðingja, Nj. 90; vera má, it may be; vera kann þat, id.: kunnu, however, takes ‘at’ whenever it means to know, and esp. in common language in phrases such as, það kann að vera, but vera kann þat, v. above.
    γ. lata, biðja, as in Engl. to let, to bid; hann lét (bað) þá fara, he let (bade) them go.
    δ. þykkja, þykjast, to seem; hann þykir vera, he is thought to be: reflex., hann þykist vera, sibi videtur: impers., mér þykir vera, mibi videtur, in all cases without ‘at.’ So also freq. the verbs hugsa, hyggja, ætla, halda, to think, when denoting merely the act of thinking; but if there be any notion of intention or purpose, they assume the ‘at;’ thus hann ætlaði, hugði, þá vera góða menn, he thought them to be, acc. c. inf.; but ætlaði at fara, meant to go, etc.
    ε. the verbs denoting to see, bear; sjá, líta, horfa á … ( videre); heyra, audire, as in Engl. I saw them come, I heard him tell, ek sá þá koma, ek heyrði hann tala.
    ζ. sometimes after the verbs eiga and ganga; hann gékk steikja, be went to roast, Vkv. 9; eiga, esp. when a mere periphrasis instead of skal, móður sína á maðr fyrst fram færa (better at færa), Grág. i. 232; á þann kvið einskis meta, 59; but at meta, id. l. 24; ráða, nema, göra …, freq. in poetry, when they are used as simple auxiliary verbs, e. g. nam hann sér Högna hvetja at rúnum, Skv. 3. 43.
    η. hljóta and verða, when used in the sense of must (as in Engl. he must go), and when placed after the infin.of another verb; hér muntu vera hljóta, Nj. 129; but hljóta at vera: fara hlýtr þú, Fms. 1. 159; but þú hlýtr at fara: verða vita, ii. 146; but verða at vita: hann man verða sækja, þó verðr (= skal) maðr eptir mann lifa, Fms. viii. 19, Fas. ii. 552, are exceptional cases.
    θ. in poetry, verbs with the verbal neg. suffix ‘-at,’ freq. for the case of euphony, take no mark of the infinitive, where it would be indispensable with the simple verb, vide Lex. Poët. Exceptional cases; hvárt sem hann vill ‘at’ verja þá sök, eða, whatever he chooses, either, Grág. i. 64; fyrr viljum vér enga kórónu at bera, en nokkut ófrelsi á oss at taka, we would rather bear no crown than …, Fms. x. 12; the context is peculiar, and the ‘at’ purposely added. It may be left out ellipt.; e. g. þá er guð gefr oss finnast (= at finnast), Dipl. ii. 14; gef honum drekka (= at drekka), Pr. 470; but mostly in unclassical writers, in deeds, or the like, written nastily and in an abrupt style.
    3.
    and að, conj. [Goth. þatei = οτι; A. S. þät; Engl. that; Germ, dass; the Ormul. and Scot. at, see the quotations sub voce in Jamieson; in all South-Teutonic idioms with an initial dental: the Scandinavian idioms form an exception, having all dropped this consonant; Swed. åt, Dan. at]. In Icel. the Bible translation (of the 16th century) was chiefly based upon that of Luther; the hymns and the great bulk of theol. translations of that time were also derived from Germany; therefore the germanised form það frequently appears in the Bible, and was often employed by theol. authors in sermons since the time of the Reformation. Jón Vidalin, the greatest modern Icel. preacher, who died in 1720, in spite of his thoroughly classical style, abounds in the use of this form; but it never took root in the language, and has never passed into the spoken dialect. After a relative or demonstr. pronoun, it freq. in mod. writers assumes the form eð, hver eð, hverir eð, hvað eð, þar eð. Before the prep. þú (tu), þ changes into t, and is spelt in a single word attú, which is freq. in some MS.;—now, however, pronounced aððú, aððeir, aððið …, = að þú…, with the soft Engl. th sound. It gener. answers to Lat. ut, or to the relat. pron. qui.
    I. that, relative to svá, to denote proportion, degree, so…, that, Lat. tam, tantus, tot…, ut; svá mikill lagamaðr, at…, so great a lawyer, that…, Nj. 1; hárið svá mikit, at þat…, 2; svá kom um síðir því máli, at Sigvaldi, it came so far, that…, Fms. xi. 95, Edda 33. Rarely and unclass., ellipt. without svá; Bæringr var til seinn eptir honum, at hann … (= svá at), Bær. 15; hlífði honum, at hann sakaði ekki, Fas. iii. 441.
    II. it is used,
    1. with indic, in a narrative sense, answering partly to Gr. οτι, Lat. quod, ut, in such phrases as, it came to pass, happened that …; þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, Nj. 2; þat var á palmdrottinsdag, at Ólafr konungr gékk út um stræti, Fms. ii. 244.
    2. with subj. answering to Lat. acc. with infin., to mark the relation of an object to the chief verb, e. g. vilda ek at þú réðist, I wished that you would, Nj. 57.
    β. or in an oblique sentence, answering to ita ut…; ef svá kann verða at þeir láti…, if it may be so that they might…, Fms. xi. 94.
    γ. with a subj. denoting design, answering to ϊνα or Lat. ut with subj., in order that; at öll veraldar bygðin viti, ut sciat totus orbis, Stj.; þeir skáru fyrir þá melinn, at þeir dæi eigi af sulti, ut ne fame perirent, Nj. 265; fyrsti hlutr bókarinnar er Kristindómsbálkr, at menn skili, in order that men may understand, Gþl. p. viii.
    III. used in connection with conjunctions,
    1. esp. þó, því, svá; þó at freq. contr. þótt; svát is rare and obsolete.
    α. þóat, þótt (North. E. ‘thof’), followed by a subjunctive, though, although, Lat. etsi, quamquam (very freq.); þóat nokkurum mönnum sýnist þetta með freku sett… þá viljum vér, Fms. vi. 21: phrases as, gef þú mér þó at úverðugri, etsi indignae (dat.), Stj. MS. col. 315, are unclass., and influenced by the Latin: sometimes ellipt. without ‘þó,’ eigi mundi hón þá meir hvata göngu sinni, at (= þóat) hon hraeddist bana sinn, Edda 7, Nj. 64: ‘þó’ and ‘at’ separated, svarar hann þó rétt, at hann svari svá, Grág. i. 23; þó er rétt at nýta, at hann sé fyrr skorinn, answering to Engl. yet—though, Lat. attamen —etsi, K. Þ. K.
    β. því at, because, Lat. nam, quia, with indic.; því at allir vóru gerfiligir synir hans, Ld. 68; því at af íþróttum verðr maðr fróðr, Sks. 16: separated, því þegi ek, at ek undrumst, Fms. iii. 201; því er þessa getið, at þat þótti, it i s mentioned because …, Ld. 68.
    γ. svá at, so that, Lat. ut, ita ut; grátrinn kom upp, svá at eingi mátti öðrum segja, Edda 37: separated, so … that, svá úsvúst at …, so bad weather, that, Bs. i. 339, etc.
    2. it is freq. used superfluously, esp. after relatives; hver at = hverr, quis; því at = því, igitur; hverr at þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða, Fms. v. 159; hvern stvrk at hann mundi fá, 44; ek undrumst hvé mikil ógnarraust at liggr í þér, iii. 201; því at ek mátti eigi þar vera elligar, því at þar var kristni vel haldin, Fas. i. 340.
    IV. as a relat. conj.:
    1. temp, when, Lat. quum; jafnan er ( est) mér þá verra er ( quum) ek fer á braut þaðan, en þá at ( quum) ek kem, Grett. 150 A; þar til at vér vitum, till we know, Fms. v. 52; þá at ek lýsta (= þá er), when, Nj. 233.
    2. since, because; ek færi yðr (hann), at þér eruð í einum hrepp allir, because of your being all of the same Rape, Grág. i. 260; eigi er kynlegt at ( though) Skarphéðinn sé hraustr, at þat er mælt at…, because (since) it is a saying that…, Nj. 64.
    V. in mod. writers it is also freq. superfluously joined to the conjunctions, ef að = ef, si, (Lv. 45 is from a paper MS.), meðan að = meðan, dum; nema að, nisi; fyrst að = fyrst, quoniam; eptir að, síðan að, postquam; hvárt að = hvárt, Lat. an. In the law we find passages such as, þá er um er dæmt eina sök, at þá eigu þeir aptr at ganga í dóminn, Grág. i. 79; ef þing ber á hina helgu viku, at þat á eigi fyrir þeim málum at standa, 106; þat er ok, at þeir skulu reifa mál manna, 64; at þeir skulu með váttorð þá sök sækja, 65: in all these cases ‘at’ is either superfluous or, which is more likely, of an ellipt. nature, ‘the law decrees’ or ‘it is decreed’ being understood. The passages Sks. 551, 552, 568, 718 B, at lokit (= at ek hefi lokit), at hugleitt (= at ek hefi h.), at sent (= at ek hefi sent) are quite exceptional.
    4.
    and að, an indecl. relat. pronoun [Ulf. þatei = ος, ος αν, οστις, οσπερ, οιος, etc.; Engl. that, Ormul. at], with the initial letter dropped, as in the conj. at, (cp. also the Old Engl. at, which is both a conj. and a pronoun, e. g. Barbour vi. 24 in Jamieson: ‘I drede that his gret wassalage, | And his travail may bring till end, | That at men quhilc full litil wend.’ | ‘His mestyr speryt quhat tithings a t he saw.’—Wyntoun v. 3. 89.) In Icel. ‘er’ (the relat. pronoun) and ‘at’ are used indifferently, so that where one MS. reads ‘er,’ another reads ‘at,’ and vice versâ; this may easily be seen by looking at the MSS.; yet as a rule ‘er’ is much more freq. used. In mod. writers ‘at’ is freq. turned into ‘eð,’ esp. as a superfluous particle after the relative pron. hverr (hver eð, hvað eð, hverir eð, etc.), or the demonstr. sá (sá eð, þeir eð, hinir eð, etc.):—who, which, that, enn bezta grip at ( which) hafði til Íslands komið, Ld. 202; en engi mun sá at ( cui) minnisamara mun vera, 242; sem blótnaut at ( quae) stærst verða, Fms. iii. 214; þau tiðendi, at mér þætti verri, Nj. 64, etc. etc.
    5.
    n. collision (poët.); odda at, crossing of spears, crash of spears, Höfuðl. 8.
    β. a fight or bait of wild animals, esp. of horses, v. hesta-at and etja.
    6.
    the negative verbal suffix, v. -a.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > AT

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

  • Command Mode —   [engl.], Befehlsmodus …   Universal-Lexikon

  • command mode — komandinis režimas statusas T sritis automatika atitikmenys: angl. command mode vok. Befehlsbetriebsart, f; Befehlsmodus, m; Kommandozustand, m rus. командный режим, m pranc. mode d ordre, m …   Automatikos terminų žodynas

  • Command and Data modes (modem) — Command and Data modes refer to the two modes in which a computer modem may operate. These modes are defined in the Hayes command set, which is the de facto standard for all modems. These modes exist because there is only one channel of… …   Wikipedia

  • Mode (computer interface) — This article is about a transient state in user interfaces. For modes in videogames, see Game mode. For other uses, see Mode (disambiguation). Not to be confused with Multimodal interaction or Modality (human computer interaction). In user… …   Wikipedia

  • mode d'ordre — komandinis režimas statusas T sritis automatika atitikmenys: angl. command mode vok. Befehlsbetriebsart, f; Befehlsmodus, m; Kommandozustand, m rus. командный режим, m pranc. mode d ordre, m …   Automatikos terminų žodynas

  • Command & Conquer 3: Kane's Wrath — Developer(s) EA Los Angeles BreakAway Games[1] Publisher(s) …   Wikipedia

  • Command & Conquer: Alerte Rouge: Mission Tesla — Command Conquer : Alerte rouge Pour les articles homonymes, voir Alerte rouge. Command Conquer Alerte rouge Éditeur Virgin Interactive, Electronic Arts (Windows) Développeur …   Wikipédia en Français

  • Command & Conquer : Alerte Rouge — Command Conquer : Alerte rouge Pour les articles homonymes, voir Alerte rouge. Command Conquer Alerte rouge Éditeur Virgin Interactive, Electronic Arts (Windows) Développeur …   Wikipédia en Français

  • Command & Conquer : Alerte Rouge : Mission Tesla — Command Conquer : Alerte rouge Pour les articles homonymes, voir Alerte rouge. Command Conquer Alerte rouge Éditeur Virgin Interactive, Electronic Arts (Windows) Développeur …   Wikipédia en Français

  • Command & Conquer : Alerte rouge — Command Conquer : Alerte rouge Pour les articles homonymes, voir Alerte rouge. Command Conquer Alerte rouge Éditeur Virgin Interactive, Electronic Arts (Windows) Développeur …   Wikipédia en Français

  • Command & Conquer : Alerte rouge - Missions M.A.D. — Command Conquer : Alerte rouge Pour les articles homonymes, voir Alerte rouge. Command Conquer Alerte rouge Éditeur Virgin Interactive, Electronic Arts (Windows) Développeur …   Wikipédia en Français

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»